Nokia 6250 User Manual
Electronic us erâÂÂs guide released s ubject to "Nokia Us erâÂÂs Guide s Terms an d Conditions, 7th June , 1998" User guide 9352583 Issue 2
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, Nokia Mobile Phones Lt d declare under our sole responsib ility that the product NHM -3 is in conformity with the provisions of the following Council Dire ctive: 199 9/5/EC. Copyright é Nokia M obile Phones 2000. All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfer , distribution or storage of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior w ritten permission of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia and Nokia Connecting People are regis tered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners. Nokia tune is a trademark of Nokia Corporation. US Patent No 58 18437 and other pending pat ents. T9 text input software Copyright (C) 199 7-2000. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights rese rved. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security . Nokia operates a policy of continuous development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nokia be responsible for any loss of data or i ncome or any special, incidental, consequential or i ndirect damages howsoever caused. The contents of this document are provided "as is". Except as required by applicable law , no warranties of any kind, either exp ress or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fit ness for a particular purpose, are mad e in relation to the accuracy , reliability or contents of this document. N okia reserves the right to revise this document or withdra w it at any t ime with out pri or noti ce The availability of particular products may vary by region. Please check with the Nokia dealer nearest to you.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Quick guide Quick guide â Quick guide These pages give you some tips for using your Nokia 6250 phone. For more detailed information, read through the user guide. â Making your first call Before you can make your first call, see âÂÂGetting startedâ on page 27 to learn how to ⢠insert the SIM card, ⢠install and charge the battery , ⢠switch on your phone. 1. Key in the area code and phone number and press . 2. Press to end the call. â Call functions Answer ing a ca ll ⢠Press . ⢠Press Op ti on s if you wan t to mute the ringing ton e before answering a call. Then select Answer from th e selection list or press to answer th e silent call. Ending / rejectin g a call Press or press Reject .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Quick guide Quick guide â Adju sting th e earpie ce vol ume ⢠Press the volume keys on the left side of the phone. ⢠Automatic volume control (AVC) can be activated th rough Menu 4-1-1. See page 77. Last number redial Press in the standby mode to access the list of last dialled numbers. Scroll with or to the de sired number and press . Call ing yo ur vo ice m ailbo x Press and hold . If the phone asks for the voice m ailbox number , key it in an d press OK . Calling by us ing a voice tag First, you need to a dd a voice tag to a name, see â V oice dialling â on page 50. T hen press and hold Names and s ay the name to make a call. â Phone book functions Quick save Key in the phone number , press Options and select Save from the list. Key in the name and press OK . Quick find In the standby mode, press , key in the first letter of the name, scroll with or to the desired name.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Quick guide Quick guide â â Basic menu functions Entering a menu Press Menu , scroll with or to the desired menu function and press Sel ect . Exit ing a m enu Press to exi t a menu function without changing its settings and return to standby mo de. â Ke ypad lock functions Locking the keyp ad Press Menu , the n (with in 2 se conds). Unlockin g the keypad Press Unlock and then quickly . Auto mati c keyl ock a nd key lock c ode Y ou can als o set time delay to lock your keypad automatically and lock/unlock the keypad with a code, see page 8 1 for details.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 6 Contents Quick guide ........................................................ ....................................... ......................................... 3 Contents ..................... ........................................ .......................................................... ..................... . 6 For your safety ................................................... ....................................... ...................... ................. 15 General information ...................... ........................................................... ........................... ............ 17 Stickers in the sales package ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 17 Security c ode ......... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ .... ... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 17 Network serv ices ........ ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ .. ..... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .... 17 Accessories .. ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ..... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ...... 18 Typographics used in this guide .. ....... .......... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ..... ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... .... 19 1. Your phone ................................ ........................................................... ........................ ............... 20 Using your phone i n wet and damp conditions ........... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... ...... ....... ....... ........ ...... 20 Special feat ures ..... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ..... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .... 21 Keys of your phone.... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... ...... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .... 22 The sel ection keys .. ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ . ......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ...... 23 The display indic ators.......... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... .......... ....... ........ ....... .... 24 Standby mode .... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ......... 24 List of indic ators in the standby mode . ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... .. ... ....... .......... ....... ........ ...... 25 2. Getting started ............................................. ....................................... .......................... ............. 27 Installing the SIM card and the battery ..................................... .......................................... ........ ..... ....... .......... ....... ........ ...... 27 Charging the ba ttery ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ...... ...... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ...... 30 Switching th e phone on and off ........ ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ .. ..... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .... 31 If the phone ask s for a PIN code: ... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... .. ..... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .... 31
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 7 Contents If the phone ask s for a security code: ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ .. ..... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 31 3. Call functions ................................... ........................................................... ................. ... ........... 33 Making a call .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ..... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ...... 33 Interna tional calls ..... ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ... .. .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 33 Making a call using the phone book . ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .......... ........ ... .. ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ . 33 Last number redi al....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... . .... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... . 34 Making a call by saying a voice tag ......... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... .... . ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 3 4 Speed dialling a ph one number ................. ................................................................................. ... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 34 Calling your v oice mailb ox..................................................... ................................................ ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 35 Adjusting th e earpiece volume .... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... . ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 35 Answerin g a call .. ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... . ......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... . 35 Muting the ringin g tone ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .. ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 35 Rejectin g a call ...... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ..... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 36 In-call opt ions ...... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ..... ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 36 Call waiti ng ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ... ..... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 3 7 Call hol ding ......... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .. ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 37 Making a confe rence call .... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... . ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ...... 38 4. Phone book ................... ........................................ ........................................................ .............. 39 Phone book basics......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... . .... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... .... 39 Selectin g the phone book ......... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... . ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... .... 39 Copying phone books ...... .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ...... . ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ...... 40 Entering the phone book ..... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ... .. ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 4 0 Storing names and num bers......... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ . 41 Recalling a n ame and phone number .............................................................................................. ...... ....... .......... ....... ........ . 42 Organisi ng the phone book ...... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ... ..... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ...... 43 Editing a name and number... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ..... .. ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .... 43 Erasing a name and number ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .... ...... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 43 Further phone book functions ...... .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .......... .. ... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ . 44
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 8 Assigning a phone n umber to a speed dial key ... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ . ......... ....... ....... ........ . 44 Caller groups.. .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ . ...... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 44 Adding a name and phone numb er in a caller group .... .......... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ .......... . ...... ....... ........ . 44 Setting a ringing ton e and graphic for a caller group and renaming a caller group ........ ........ ......... ........ .......... . 4 5 Removing a name an d number from a caller group . ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ......... . ....... ........ ...... 46 Copying via infrare d .. .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... . ....... ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... .... 46 Copying a name and number from your phone ...... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ........ .. ....... ....... ........ . 46 Copying a name and phone number to your phone ...... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ..... ..... ....... ........ . 46 Sending and recei ving names and phone numbers ........ ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... .... 47 Storing mu ltiple numbers and text items per name ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ......... . ....... ........ ....... .... 47 Adding a new number or text item to a name: ........... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... . ...... ....... ........ ...... 48 To change the defau lt number: ........ ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... .... ....... .......... ....... ........ ...... 49 Setting the type of view for stored names an d numbers......... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... . .... ....... ......... 49 Service numb ers ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ..... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 49 Memory stat us ...... ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ .......... ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .... 50 Voice diall ing ......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 50 Adding a voice ta g to a phone number .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ..... .. ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 51 Making a call by using a voice tag ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ...... . ....... ........ ....... ....... ..... ........ . 52 Replayi ng, erasing or changing a voi ce tag.......... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... .... ....... .......... ....... ........ . 52 5. Using the Menu .... ........................................................... ........................................ ........ ........... 54 Accessing a menu fun ction by scrolling ......... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... . ...... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 54 Accessing a menu fun ction by using its shortcut number ...... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ...... .... ....... ........ ...... 55 List of menu functions ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ..... ... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ . 56 6. Menu functions ............................................ ....................................... ............................ ........... 59 Messages (Men u 1) ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ . 59 Writing an d sending text messages....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... ...... ........ ....... ....... ........ ...... 5 9 Predictive text input ......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ...... ...... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ . 60 Standard ans wers and t emplates .......... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... . .... .......... ....... ........ ..... ...... 63
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 9 Contents Inserting pic tures ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... . ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 63 Reading and vie wing text and picture mes sages ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ...... .... ........ ....... ....... .... 64 Replying to a message ... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... ... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... . 65 Special send ing options .... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ...... . ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ...... 66 Sending a text mes sage to multipl e recipients .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ... .... ........ ....... ....... .... 66 Sending a text mes sage by message profile.... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... .... .... ....... ........ ......... .... 67 Organis ing your messages..... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... . .......... ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ . 67 Inbox and Outbox fold ers ..... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ..... ... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ...... 67 Archive folder an d user-specified fold ers .......... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ .... ... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 68 Message s ettings ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 69 Settings common to all text messages ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 69 Setting for Mes sage profiles ..... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... . .... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 7 0 Call regi ster (Menu 2) .. ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 71 Missed calls (Men u 2-1) . ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 72 Receive d calls (Menu 2- 2) ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ .... ...... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 72 Dialled numbers (Men u 2-3) ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .. ..... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 72 Erase recent call lists ( Menu 2-4) ...... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ... .. ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 72 Call durati on (Menu 2-5) ...... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ... .... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 73 Call cost s (Menu 2-6) ...... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... .. ...... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .... 73 Profiles (Men u 3) ...... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ..... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ . 74 Activati ng a user profile ........ ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ . 74 Customisi ng Profiles ...... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... . ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 7 5 Settings you can personalise ......... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ .... ... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 75 Renaming profi les...... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .... .... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... . 76 Settings (Me nu 4) .... ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ...... ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 77 Call set tings (Menu 4-1) .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .. ..... ........ ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ . 77 Automatic vo lume control (Menu 4-1- 1) ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .... .... ....... ........ ....... ...... 7 7 Anykey answer ( Menu 4-1-2)..... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ..... ... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 78 Automatic redia l (Menu 4-1-3) ...... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... . .... ....... ........ .......... ....... ...... 78
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 10 Speed dialling (M enu 4-1-4) ........................................ ............................................................ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ...... 78 Call waiti ng service (Me nu 4-1-5) .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ . 78 Line for outgoing cal ls (Menu 4-1-6) .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ..... ..... ....... ....... ........ ....... .... 79 Summary after call (Menu 4-1-7) ...... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... . ....... ........ ....... .......... ...... 79 Fax or data call (Me nu 4-1-8) ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ...... 7 9 Own numbe r sending ( Menu 4-1-9) ......... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... . ....... ....... .......... ....... .... 79 Phone setti ngs (Menu 4-2) .......... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ...... ........ ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .... 80 Language (Men u 4-2-1) ....... ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ...... 80 Cell i nfo display (Menu 4-2-2 ) ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ...... ...... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 80 Welcome not e (Menu 4-2-3) ... ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ........ . ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ . 80 Network sel ection (Menu 4-2-4 ) ..... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ...... ....... ....... ....... .......... ......... 80 Display con trast (Menu 4-2- 5) .. ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ..... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ . 81 Confirm SIM serv ice actions (Me nu 4-2-6) ......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .. ..... .......... ....... ........ . 81 Keylock set tings (Menu 4-3) ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 81 Automatic keylock (Menu 4-3-1 ) ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 81 Keylock code (Menu 4-3-2) ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... .......... ...... 82 Change key lock code (Menu 4-3-3)........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ..... .......... ....... ........ ....... .... 82 Communic ation settings (Me nu 4-4) . ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ . 83 Info service (Menu 4-4-1)......... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ...... 8 3 Listen t o voice messages (Me nu 4-4-2)...... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... . ......... ....... .......... ........ . 83 Voice mail box number (Menu 4-4-3 ) ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 84 Service comm and editor (Menu 4-4-4 ) ... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ... ..... ....... ....... ........ ...... 84 Security se ttings (Menu 4- 5) ......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ...... ...... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... .... 84 PIN code request (Men u 4-5-1) ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ..... ... ....... ........ ....... .......... ...... 84 Call barring serv ice (Menu 4-5-2) ... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 85 Fixed dialling (Menu 4-5- 3) ................ ................................ ..................................... ............... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 85 Closed user group ( Menu 4-5-4).... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ............. ....... ....... ........ ...... 86 Security l evel (Menu 4-5-5) .. ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... .... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ......... 86
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 11 Contents Change of access codes (Menu 4-5-6) ... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ..... .. ....... ........ ....... .......... . 87 Restore factory settings (Menu 4-6) ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ...... ........ ........ ....... ....... ........ . 87 Call divert (Menu 5) ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .. ...... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 87 Games (Men u 6) ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... . ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ...... 88 To st art a new game ...... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... ... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 89 To st art a 2-play er game ..... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ..... ... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... .... 89 Game optio ns ...... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... . .... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 89 Calcul ator (Menu 7) .......... ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ..... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ...... 90 Using the ca lculator....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .. ... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 90 Currency co nversion ...... ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... .. ...... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .... 91 Setting th e exchange rate in Cal culator ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ .... ........ ....... ........ ......... .... 91 Calend ar (Menu 8) ..... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... .... ... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... .... 92 Calenda r views ........... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... .... 92 Day view .... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ . 92 Note view ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ... .... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 92 Week lis t ......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 9 2 Options li st of calendar views...... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ..... .. ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ . 93 Adding a calendar not e ..... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ...... . ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 93 When the phone alarm s for a note .......... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ...... . ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 94 Task jou rnal (Menu 9) .... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... ...... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 94 Restart (Men u 9-1) .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... . ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... .... 95 Add new (Menu 9-2) ......... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ...... ...... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 95 Find (Menu 9 -3) .... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 96 Edit (Menu 9-4 )....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... .... ... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 9 6 Erase (Menu 9-5 ) .... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . ...... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ...... 96 History (Me nu 9-6) ..... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ... .... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 97 Details.... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 98 Send as SMS ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ . .... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ . 99 Transferring T ask journal data to a PC usi ng a cable . ......... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ... ....... ....... ....... ........ . 99
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 12 Transferring T ask journal data to a compat ible PC via infrared......... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ......... ...... ....... .. 100 Active w ork view ...... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ...... . ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... 100 Pause tas k ........... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... . ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ......... 100 Stop task .......... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 1 01 Add cost....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ..... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ....... 101 Add comment..... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ..... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .. 102 Clock ( Menu 10) ......... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ... ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .. 103 Stopwatch (Menu 10 -1) ... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... .. ... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... 103 Split ti ming ......... ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ...... ....... ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ....... 104 Lap timing ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ..... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .. 105 Saving or reset ting times ..... ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .... ... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... .... 105 Viewing t imes ........ ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... .. 105 Deleting times...... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... 106 Stopwatch memory . ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .. ..... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... 106 Alarm clock (M enu 10-2) .... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... . ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .. 106 Time setti ngs (Menu 10-3) ... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .. 107 Show clock / Hide cloc k (Menu 10-3-1) ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... .... ... ........ ....... .......... .... 107 Set the time ( Menu 10-3-2)..... ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .. 107 Time format (Menu 1 0-3-3) ..... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ...... . .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .. 108 Sound met er (Menu 11) ............. ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ . ...... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .. 108 Infrared (Menu 12 ) .... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... .... ........ ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 1 09 To send and rec eive data via IR ...... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ...... ...... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... 110 Checking t he status of an IR conn ection ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ..... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 1 10 Mobile Internet Services (WAP) ..... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... .... . ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ....... 111 Setting up the phone for the WAP services .... .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... . ....... ....... ....... .......... .. 111 Saving the set tings receiv ed as a text message ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ..... ....... ....... ........ .... 112 Keying i n the settings ma nually .......... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... 112 Editing th e settings . ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ..... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ....... 113 Accessi ng WAP pages ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ .... 114
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 13 Contents Activati ng a connection set ...... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... .. 114 Accessing a WAP page by openi ng the homepage......... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ... ..... ....... ....... .. 115 Bookmarks ........ .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .. ........ ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 115 Accessing a WAP page by entering its addre ss .......... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .. ........ ........ ....... .... 116 Viewing W AP pages ........... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .. ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 116 Keys use d in WAP navigation ..... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ . .... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .. 116 Emptying t he cac he ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... ... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... .... 117 Security ce rtificates .. ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... ...... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 118 SIM servic es (Menu 14) ...... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... .. 119 7. Data and f ax communications ........ ....................................... ................................................. 1 20 Connecti ng your phone to a computer.......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ... .... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 120 Installing commu nications applications and modem drivers ....................................................................... ........ ....... .. 120 Using communic ations applicati ons ...... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... .. ..... ........ ....... ........ ....... .... 120 8. Reference information . ........................................................... ........................................ .... ..... 122 Access c odes ........... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ..... .. ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .. 122 Security code (5 digi ts) .......... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... . ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 122 PIN code (4 to 8 digit s) ..... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ .... ... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... .... 122 PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits ) ............ ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... .... .... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... .. 122 PUK code (8 digits) .... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... .... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ....... 123 PUK2 code (8 digi t) ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .. 123 Keylock code (4 digit) .... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ..... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ....... 123 Barring pass word ......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... . .... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 123 Batter y information ...... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... .. ...... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ....... 123 Charging and disc harging the battery.......... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... .. ..... ........ ....... ........ ....... .... 123 Using the batte ries ............ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 124 Care and maintenance....... ........................................ ........................................................... . ........ 126
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 14 Important safety informatio n ........................... ....................................... ................................. .... 1 27 Technical specifications ..................................... ........................................................... ....... .......... 131
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. For your safety 15 For your safety For your safety Read these simpl e guidelines. Breaking the rule s may be dangerous or illegal. Furt her detailed information is give n in this manual. ROAD SAFETY COM ES FIRST Don â t use a hand-held phone while driving; park the ve hicle first. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may get interference which c ould affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any regulations or rules. Switch phone off near me dical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Wireless phones can ca use interference. Usin g them on aircraft is illegal. SWITCH OFF WHEN R EFUELING Don â t use phone at a refuellin g point. Don â t use nea r fuel or che micals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Don â t use phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. USE SENSIBLY Use only in normal position ( to ear). Don â t touch the antenna area unne cessarily .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. For your safety 16 USE QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified servic e personnel must ins tall or repair equipment. ACCESSORIES A ND BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. CONNECT ING TO OTHER DEVICES When connec ting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect in compatible products. Re member to m ake backup c opies of all i mportant data. MAKING CALLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Enter the phone numbe r , including the area code, then press . To end a c all press . To answer a c all press . EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure t he phone is switched on an d in servic e. Press as many t imes as neede d (e.g. to exit a call, to exit a menu, et c.) to cle ar the d isplay. Enter the em ergenc y numb er , then press . Give your location. Do not end the call until told t o do so. INFRARED P RECAUTIONS Do not point the IR beam at anyones â s eyes or allow it to inte rfere with other IR device s.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. General information 17 General information General info rmation This chapter gives you s ome general information on your new Nokia phone and this user guide. â Stickers in the sales package The stickers contain important information for service and customer support purposes. Attach the sticker with th e text â ITEMâ and â IMEIâ on page 2 of this user guide. Attach the sticker to the Club Nokia Invita tion Card supplied in the sales package. â Security code The factory setting for the security code is 12345. To avoid unauthorised use of you r phone, change the code in the Settings / Security settin gs / Security lev el (Men u 4-5-5 ) and Chang e of a ccess c ode s (Menu 4-5-6). K eep the new code secret and in a safe place which is separate from your phone. â Network service s The wireless phone described in this u ser guide is approved for use on the EGSM900, GSM1800 an d GSM900/1 800 dua l-band ne tworks. Note that Dual band functionality is a network-dependent feature. Check with your local service provider if you ca n subscribe to and use the dual ba nd functionality . A number of f eatures included in this user guide ar e called network services. They are special services provided by wireless service providers. Before you can take advantage of any of these network services,
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. General information 18 you must subscribe to th ese service(s) from your home service provider and obtain instructions for their use. â Accessories Li-Ion battery BLL-2 is the m anufacturer-approved rechargeable battery available for your phone. This apparatus is intended for u se when supplied with power from ACP-7, ACP-8, and LCH-9 batter y chargers. Other usage will invalidate any approval given to th is apparatus and may be dangerous. Wa r ni n g ! Use only batteries, chargers and accessories approved by the phone manufacturer for use with this particular phone m odel. The us e of any other types w ill invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be danger ous. For availability of approved accessories, please check with your dealer . When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory , grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Please note that the a ccessories to be used with the Nok ia 6250 do not meet the same durabili ty or wat er resis tance spec ificat ions as t he phone it self . For example , all the char gers are only to be u sed in dry con dition s - NE VER when wet or damp.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. General information 19 General information WALL MOUNTING OF THE WALL/DESK STAND Wa ll/Desk Stand DCV-6 is a Nokia 6250 specific accessory . It has a wall mounting option for charging your Nokia 6250 ph one with Nokia chargers ACP-8 or ACP-7. The picture s eries below shows how the stand should be mounted on a wall. Note: The availability of partic ular products may vary by the region. Please check with the Nokia dealer nearest you. â T ypographics used in this guide The display texts which appear on the phone â s display are in dicated in italic typeface, for example Calling . The display texts related to the selection keys are indicated in bold typeface, for exam ple Men u . Only the selection key texts without th e key symbols are shown in the text. In this user guide all key presses are represente d by icons such as and .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Your phone 20 1. Y our phone The Nokia 6250 is a durable quality phone. Its advanced mechanical solu tions make it dust and wat er resistant; it can withstand temporary immersion in water w ithout harmful effects. It can take a considerable drop onto a hard surface. However , even though the phone is designed to meet your tough demands, it is not meant to be thrown around on purpose. It is a high-tech piece of equipment and should be treated as such. Repeated droppings may , over time, deteriorate the performance of your phone. The speaker , buzzer and microphone are sealed so as to be dust and water resistant. Therefore never use any sharp tools that can damage th eir coating. Even though the car anten na connector is made durable and water -resistant, keep the rubber cap (provided with the phone) in place when not using the active car kit to minimize the r isk of any small items and /or humidity e ntering the connector and possibly deter iorating the performance and /or water resistance of th e phone. â Using your phone in wet and damp conditions ⢠Never try to use the phone un der water . ⢠You ca n use this phone in the rain, but do n ot take it with you when you go e.g. swimming. ⢠If the phone, and especially the system connector , has been exposed to salt water , immediate rinsing with freshwater is recommended to avoid corrosion. The phone m ust be wiped dry carefully after it has been r insed.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Your phone 21 Your phone ⢠Before opening the back cover , the phone must be wiped dry to avoid water entering the interior of your phone. Th e SIM card and battery are n ot water resistant. ⢠Always remember that the accessories do not m eet the same durability or water resistance specifications as the phone itself . ⢠Never ch arge the phone when th e bottom connector i s wet or da mp. ⢠Never use a damp phone wi th accessories that have an electrica l functionality (e.g. Wall/Desk Stand, Adva nced HF Car Kit, etc.). â Special featur es Y o ur phone has many new features to meet your needs in tough enviro nments and elsewh ere. ⢠With the Ta sk journal (Menu 9) you can for example keep track of working times and costs. ⢠Stopwatch (Menu 1 0-1) enables the taking of intermediate times an d lap times. ⢠Sound meter (Menu 1 1) reveals the estimated noise level of your surroundings. ⢠Automatic volume control can be sele cted on or off with Menu 4 -1-1. ⢠Keypad can be locked automatically and with a code, see page 81. ⢠Display contrast (Menu 4-2-5) offers a selection of ten different contrast levels f or the display . ⢠Currencies can be converted in the standby mode if you have set the exchange r ate in Calculator (Menu 7). ⢠Timed profiles allow you to turn a profile on for a certain period of time, see page 74. ⢠The Quick silent feature mutes the ringing tone of an incoming call immediately . The silent call can be answered as usual, see page 35.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Your phone 22 â Keys of your phone Sele ction keys These keys perform the fun ction indicated by the text i mmedi- ately above them, e.g. Select or OK . Scroll k eys Use these keys to scroll th rough names, phone numbers, menus or setting options or to get quick access to the phone book. Dials a phone number and answers a call. Sends the ongoing call to Hold if pressed dur ing a call. In th e standby mode: shows the list of the most recently dialled numbers. Ends or rejects a call. Also exits from any function at any time. Enter num bers and characters. Pressing and holding of calls your voice mailbox. Used for various purposes in different functions.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Your phone 23 Your phone The selection keys Below the display you wil l find two selection keys: P ower key (1) Pressing the power key switches the phone on or off. Pressing this key br iefly while in the standby mode or during a call: enters the list of pr ofiles. Pressing the key briefl y while in the ph one book or menu func- tions: turns the display lights on for 15 seconds. V olume k eys (2) The upper key increases and the lower key de creases the ear- piece volume.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Your phone 24 The functions of th ese keys depend on the guiding tex ts shown above the keys. For example, when th e text Menu appears above the key , pr essing this key enters the menu functions. Similarly , pressin g the key under the text Names allows access to the phone b ook functions. Pressing and holding Names activates voice dialling. In this user guide, the selection keys are indicated by the relevant guiding text in bold ty pe. â The display indicators Display indicators and icons inform you about the opera tion of your phone. Standby mode The indicators described below are shown when the phone is ready f or use, with no characters entered by the user . This screen is ca lled standby mode. The Nokia 6250 has 7-bar battery and signal status indicators xxxxxx Indicates in which cellular network the phone is currently used.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Your phone 25 Your phone Shows the signal s trength of the cellular network at your current loca tion. The higher the bar , the stronger the signal. Shows the battery charge level. The higher the bar , the more power in the battery . List of i ndicators i n the standby mode The following icons may also be shown when the ph one is in the standby mode: Indicates that you have received one or several text or picture messages. See â Messag es (Men u 1) â on page 59. Indicates that you have r eceived one or severa l voice messages. Indicates that the phone does not r ing at an incoming call. See â Settings you ca n personalise â on page 75. Indicates that the phone â s keypad is locked. See â Keyloc k setti ngs (Me nu 4-3) â on page 8 1. Indicates that you have set the alarm clock . See â Alarm clock (Menu 1 0-2) â on page 106. Indicates that you have activated one or more call diverts. See â Call divert (Menu 5) â on page 87. Indicates that your calls ar e limited to a closed user group (network service). See â Closed user group (Menu 4- 5-4) â on page 86. Indicates that a task in the Task journal is still active. See â Task j ournal (M enu 9) â on page 94. Indicates that you have stopwatch timing going on in the backgr ound. See â Stopwatch (Menu 10- 1) â on page 1 03.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Your phone 26 Indicates that a profile i s timed, see â Profiles (Menu 3 ) â on page 74.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Getting started 27 Getting started 2. Gettin g started â Installing the SIM card and the battery ⢠Keep all miniatu re SIM cards out of the r each of small children. ⢠The SIM card and its contacts can eas ily be damaged by scratches or ben ding, so be careful when handling, inserting or r emoving the card. ⢠Before installing the SIM card, always m ake sure that the phone is dry and switched of f and only then remove the back cover . 1. With the back of the phone facing you, open the screw by pressing it lightly and turning it 90 degrees to the left.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Getting started 28 2. Remove the water resistant back cover by lifting it up. 3. Remove the BLL-2 battery if th ere is one. Note : When removing the back cover and battery , do not tamper with the other screws or the cover seals. If you do, you may invalidate the warranty. 4. Open the SIM card holder by pressing the middle wires from sides lightly and by releasin g the card holder from its place. 5. Insert your SIM card ensuring that the bevelled corner is on th e bottom right and the golde n contact area is facing downwards.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Getting started 29 Getting started 6. When SIM card is inserted, close the c ard holder downwards and press the wires from sides again to lock the card holder in to the slots. 7. Replace the battery . Note: Ensure you place the batt ery so that the electric contacts of the battery an d the phone touch on e another . Make sure the in terior of your phone and the back cov er seals are dry and clean, an d free of any foreign objects. For eign objects may damage the seals a gainst water . Never detach the cover seals .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Getting started 30 8. Attach the back c over and close it tightly by turning the screw 90 degrees to the r ight. â Charging the batter y Note: Never charge the phone when the bottom connector or phone itself is wet or damp! The charger should always be dry . 1. Attach the lead from the charger to the socket (A) on the bottom of your phone. 2. Connect the charger to an AC wall outlet or use the Nokia car accessories compatible with your ph one. The battery indicator bar starts to scroll. The text Charging is briefly displayed if the phone is switched on. Y ou can use the phone while charging. If the battery is totally empty , it may take a few minutes before the char ging indication appears on the display or any calls can be made. The charging time depends on th e charger and battery used. For example, char ging a BLL-2 battery with an ACP-8 charge r takes 2 hou rs 45 minute s.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Getting started 31 Getting started 3. The battery is fully charged wh en the battery indicator bar stops scrolling, and the text Battery full is briefly displayed (if the ph one is on). If the text N ot charging is displayed, charging has been suspended. W ait for a while, disconnect the charger , plug it in again and retry . If charging still fa ils, contact your dealer . â Switching the phone on and of f Press and hold the po wer key . If the phone ask s for a PIN code: The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card. ⢠Key in the PIN code (displayed as * ***), and press OK . See also â Access codes â on page 122. If the phone ask s for a se curity code: ⢠Key in the five-digit security code (displayed as *****), and press OK . See also â Access codes â on page 122. War ni ng! Do not switch on the phone when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interf erence or danger .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Getting started 32 Note: Your phone has a built-in antenna. As with any other radio- transmitting device, do not touch the antenna area unnecessarily when the phone is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cau se the phone to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Not touching the antenna area during a call optimizes the antenna performance and th e talk time of your phone.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Call functions 33 Call functions 3. Ca ll functi ons â Making a call 1. Key in the phone number including the area code. To edit a number on the display , press or to m ove the cursor . Press Clear to delete the character to the left of the cursor . 2. Press or press Options and then select Call to call the number . 3. Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Norm al posi tion: Hold the phone as you would any other telephone. Internat ional calls 1. Press twice for the in ternational prefix (the character replaces the international access code). 2. Enter the country code, ar ea code, and the phone number . 3. T o call th e number , p ress . Making a call us ing the ph one book 1. Press Names . 2. Scroll to Search and press Select . 3. Key in the first letter or more of the n ame and press Searc h .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Call functions 34 Y ou can skip this step if you like. 4. Use and to reach the desired name. 5. Press to call the number . Tip: Y ou can enter the Phone book quick ly by pressing in the standby mode the scroll keys or . Last number redial The last ten phone n umbers you called or attempted to call are stored in the phone â s memory . To redial one of these last-dialled numbers: 1. When in the standby mode, press once to access the list of the last-dialled numbers. 2. Use or to reach the desired number or name and press . Making a call by saying a v oice tag Before you can make a call using voice tags, you m ust add the voice tag to a name. See â V oice dialling â on page 50. Speed di alling a ph one number If you have assigned a phone number to one of the speed dialling keys to , you can call that phone number in either of the following w ays: ⢠Press the corresponding speed dialling key an d press . ⢠If t he Speed dialling s set to On : Press and hold the cor responding speed dialling key ( to ) until the call is started.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Call functions 35 Call functions See â Assigning a phone number to a speed dial keyâ on page 44 and â Speed dialling a phone numberâ on page 34. Note: Pressing and holding dials y our voice mailbox number . Calling your voice mail box 1. Press and h old when in the standby mode. 2. If the phone asks for the voice mailbox number , key it in and press OK . Y ou obtain this number from your service provider . To edit this num ber at a later time, see â V oice mailbox number (Menu 4-4-3) â on page 84. Adjusting the earpiece v olume Y ou can adjust the earpiece volume of your phone during a call. Pr ess to increase and to decrease the volume level. See also â Automati c volume control (Me nu 4-1-1) â on page 77. â Answering a call 1. T o answer a call, press . 2. Press to end the ca ll. Muting the ring ing tone Y ou can m ute the ringing tone by pressing Options . Now you can answer the call either by selectin g Answer from the selection list or by pressing .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Call functions 36 Rejecting a call To reject an in coming call and to send the caller th e â line busy â tone, press or Reject . If the Divert if b usy function is activated â Call divert (Menu 5) â on page 87, the call is diverted for example to y our voice mailbox. â In-call options Y our phone provides a number of functions that you can use during a call. M any of the in-call options are network dependent. By pre ssing Options during a call some or all of the followin g in-call options may be available: ⢠AVC on or AVC off (to set the automatic v olume control on or off) ⢠Hold or Unhold (to put a call on h old or to re-activate a call) ⢠New ca ll (to make a call when you have a ca ll in progress) ⢠Send DTMF (to send D TMF tone strings stored in the phone b ook or keyed in manually , for ex ample, passwords or bank account numbers) ⢠End all calls (to end all ca lls) ⢠Phone bo ok (to access the phone book) ⢠Menu (to access the Menu) ⢠Mute or Unmute (to mute the phone â s microphone or converse) ⢠Swap (to switch between the active call a nd the call on hold) ⢠Tra ns fe r (to connect a call on hold with an active call and to disconnect you from both calls)
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Call functions 37 Call functions The options Co nfer ence , Pr ivate an d En d active c all are available when two or more calls are active simultaneously . You ca n make new calls during a call by selecting Ne w ca ll option. These incall-options are also network dependent. Call wait ing This network service allows you to answer an inc oming call while you have a ca ll in progress if you have activated the menu f unction Call w aiting service (Menu 4-1- 5). 1. Press Answer or . The first call is put on h old. 2. To switch between the two calls, press Swap or . 3. T o end the active call, press , (or to end both calls at the sa me time, press Options , scroll to End all calls and press OK .) Tip: If you do not want to answer t he call, you can ignore it or reject it. T o reject the call, press Options , then scroll to Reject and press OK . If you have activated the call divert Diver t if busy (Menu 5-2), a rejected call will also be diverted. Call holding This network service allows you to make another call while you have a call in progress. 1. Press Hold or press . The first call is put on hold. 2. Make the second call. 3. To switch between the two calls, press Swap or . To end the active call, press .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Call functions 38 Tip: Y ou can also mu te the line for a while. Press Opti ons , scroll with or to Mute . When you want to resume the muted call, press Unmu te . Making a conference call This network service allows u p to six persons to take part in a conference call. 1. Make a call to the first participant. 2. Pre ss Options and scroll to New c all and press Select . Make the call to the second participant. The first call is pu t on hold. 3. To join the first participant in the conference call, press Options , choose Conference and press Select . 4. To add a n ew person to the call, repeat the steps 2 and 3. 5. To have a private conversation with one of the participan ts: ⢠Press Options , scroll to Private and press Select , then scroll to th e desired participant and press OK . Once you have finished the private conversation, return to the conference call a s described in s tep 3. 6. To end the con feren ce call, press or select Op tions and then End al l cal ls .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 39 Phone book 4. Pho ne book â Phone book basics There are two separate memories you can store names and phone numbers to: ⢠the phoneâ s internal ph one book The phone â s internal phone book can store up to 255 names (each of which can have up to 50 characters) and phone numbers . You can store 3 numbers and one text note to a name. If you have less than 255 names stored in the phone â s internal phone book, you m ay be able to store up to 5 phone numbers and two te xt notes per name. ⢠the SIM card me mory The phone supports SIM car ds that can store u p to 250 names and ph one numbers. Y ou can u se only one memory at a tim e. Note: Certain features, such as storing m ultiple numbers and text items per name or attaching voice tags to numbers only wor k when the phone â s me mory is in use. If you have numbers s tored in th e memory of the SIM card, first copy them to the phone memory . Selecti ng the phone book Y ou can set the phone to use its internal phone book or the SIM card memory for s toring names and number s. 1. In the standby mode, press Names . 2. Scroll with or to Options an d press Select .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 40 3. Scroll to Memory in use and press Se lect . 4. Scroll to Ph one (to set the phone to u se its internal phone book) or SIM card (to set the phone to use the SIM card memory) and pr ess Select . Note: After the SIM card is changed, the SIM phone book is automatically selected. Copying phon e books Y ou can copy n ames and phone numbers from the p hone â s memory into your SIM card â s memo ry or vice versa. 1. In the standby mode , press Names . 2. Scroll to Cop y and press Select . 3. Scroll with or to the desired copying direction ( From phon e to S IM c ard or Fr o m SIM car d to phone ) and press Select . 4. Scroll to On e by on e , All or Defau lt Nos. an d press Select . If you selected One by on e , scroll to the name you want to copy and press Copy . Note that when you copy From SIM car d to Phone , the text Default N os. is not shown. 5. Select whether you want to keep the original nam es and numbers or not. 6. If y ou select ed All or Default No s. , pres s OK when the text Start copy ing? is displayed. Note that after pressing Copy or selecting All or Defaul t Nos. the selection list Keep original , Eras e original appe ars. Enterin g the phone boo k ⢠Press Names in standby mode, sc roll with or to the desired function and press Select .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 41 Phone book ⢠In standby mode, press or to enter th e phone book quickly . ⢠During a call: Press Options , scroll with or to Phon e book , and press Select when Search is highlighted. Storin g names and n umbers 1. Press Names , scroll to Add name and press Select . 2. Key in the name; press a number key ( to ) repeatedly until th e desired character or number appears. The most common punctuation marks an d special characters ar e available under the number key . To insert a sp ace, press . Note: All characters ava ilable under a number key are not pr inted on the key . The characters available under a number key depend on t he language selected in the menu 4-2-1. 3. Press OK . 4. Key in an area code and phone number , and press OK . If you wish to add a voice tag, see â Adding a voice tag to a phone number â on page 5 1. Writing te xt: ⢠If the next letter is located on the same key as the present one, press or (or wait until the cursor appears again ) and then key in the letter . ⢠To switch between upper case and lower case, press quickly . The symbol ABC or abc shown at the top of the display indicates the selected case. ⢠To insert a number , press and hold the key la belled with the desired number . To switch between letters and numbers, press and hold . Number mode is indicated by 123 at the top of the display .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 42 ⢠Pressing brings up a list of special characters. Move th rough the list to the desired character with or and press Use to insert it in the name. ⢠If you make a mistake, you can remove characters to the left of the cursor by pressing Cle ar as many times as necessary . Pressing and holding Clear will clear the screen. ⢠and move the cursor right and left, respectively . Tip Quick save : When in the standby mode, key in the phone number , press Options , and select Save . Then, enter the name and press OK . Or , if you wish, save the number only: key in the phone number and press and hold Options . Recallin g a name and phone numb er 1. In the standby mode , press Names . 2. Scroll to Search and press Select . 3. Key in the first character of the name (or , press Li st to access the list of nam es) you are searching for and press Search . 4. Press or until the desired nam e appears. 5. Once the desired name is highlighted press to call the highlighted name. Tip : To qu ickly access the list of s tored names and numbers, press or when the phone is in th e standby mode.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 43 Phone book Organi sing the ph one book Edit ing a name a nd nu mber 1. Recall the name or number you want to edit and press Details. Then press Options . 2. Scroll to Edit name or Ed it number and press Select . 3. Edit the name or number and press OK . Erasing a na me and number Y ou can remove n ames and phone numbers from the selected phone book one by one or all at once. To eras e a name and num ber 1. Recall the name and number you want to edit an d press Details. Th en pr ess Opti ons . 2. Scroll to Erase and press Sel ect . Note: If you ha ve stored multiple numbers per name, the option Erase deletes the name, all the numbers and th e text notes stored under it. To eras e all names and numbers 1. Press Names , scroll to Era se and press Select . 2. Scroll to Eras e all an d press Select . 3. Scroll to the phone book you want to erase ( SIM card or Phon e ) and press OK . 4. Press OK when the text A r e you sur e? is displayed and then key in your security code an d press OK .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 44 â Further phone book functions Assigning a ph one number to a speed dial key Y ou can set any of the number keys - to work as a speed dia l key . To do this you need to assign a phone number to a number key . 1. Pre ss Names and scroll to Spe ed dial s and press Select . 2. Scroll to the desired speed dial key (2 to 9), and press Assign . 3. Pre ss Search , and s croll to the name or number and press Select . 4. Pre ss Select to assign the displa yed number . After assigning a number to a spee d dial key , you can call, view or ch ange the number or undo the speed dial. See â Speed dialling a ph one number â on page 34. Caller gro ups Y ou can set th e phone to sound a specific ringing tone and show a selected graphic on the di splay when you receive a call f rom a particular name and phone number . To do this, first include a name and number in a caller group. Then, def ine a ringing tone and gr aphic for this group. Note: Y ou can set the phone to ring only upon receiving calls from n ames and numbers that belong to a specific caller group by using the Alert for setting under the Pr ofiles menu, see â Customising Profiles â on page 75. Adding a name and ph one num ber in a ca ller grou p 1. Pre ss Names , scr oll w ith or to Caller gr oups , and press Select . 2. Scroll to the desired caller group and press Select .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 45 Phone book 3. Scroll to Members and press Select . 4. Press OK when Add name is highlighted, then scroll to the desired name and pre ss Add . 5. If you have mor e than one number stor ed under the nam e, scroll to the n umber that you want to add to the caller gr oup and then press OK . Tip: Y ou can also add a new name to a caller group by recalling it from the phone book. At the desired number , first press De tail s and then Options . Scroll to Calle r gr oups and press Select . Scroll to the de sired caller group and press Select. Sett ing a ri nging tone and gra phic for a c aller group and re nami ng a ca ller group 1. Press Names , scroll to Caller grou ps and press Sel ect . 2. Scroll to one of the caller groups and press Select . 3. Scroll to one of the f ollowing settings and press Se lec t . ⢠Group ti tle . To rename the caller gr oup, key in a ne w name and press OK . ⢠Group ring ing t one . To set the phone to r ing a specific ringing ton e for the group, scroll to the desired tone and press OK . De fault is th e tone selected for the currently selected profile. ⢠Gro up gr aphic T o set the phone to display the group gr aphic, scroll to On and press OK . The option list inclu des options for viewing and sending ( Send gr aphic ) the graphic as an Over The Air (OT A) messa ge, if supported by your network. Y ou can also receive a new gr oup graphic to your phone as an OTA message. When you r eceive a group graphic, press Show , then press Options , select Save or Discar d and press Select . If you selected Save , reach the desired caller group and press OK .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 46 Removing a name and number from a caller group 1. Pre ss Names , scr oll t o Calle r groups and press Select . 2. Scroll to the desired caller group and press Select . 3. Scroll to Me mbers and press Select . 4. Scroll to the name you want to remove, press Options and scroll to Remove name and press OK . Copying via infrar ed Copying a name and n umber from your pho ne Using your phone â s infrared (IR) port, you can send phone book entries as bu siness cards to a compatible phone or PC which is running an appropr iate application. 1. Make sure that th e other phone or the PC is set up to receive data via its IR port. 2. Recall the name and phone number to be copied . 3. Pre ss Options , scroll to Send card via IR to copy the ph one number and name to an other phone or PC. 4. Pre ss Select . Copying a name and p hone number to your phone To copy names and phone numbers from a nother compatible phone. 1. Pre ss Menu , scroll to Infrared (Men u 12) and pre ss Se lect . You r phone is r eady to receive data through its IR port. The user of the other phone can now send the nam e and phone number via In frared.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 47 Phone book 2. Once the name and ph one number have been copied to your phone, press Show . Then press Options , sel ect Save or Discar d , and press Select . Send ing and rece iving na mes and pho ne numbe rs Y ou can send or receive a person â s contact information a s a business card eith er via IR or as an Over The Air (OT A) message if supported b y the network. To send a business card as an OT A me ssage, find the desired name and n umber from the phone book and then use the option Send car d . To se nd a business card via IR, use the option Send card via IR . See also Copying via infrared on page 46. When you rece ive a business car d, press Show . Th en pr ess Option s , select Save or Disc ard , and press Select . Note: Business cards are always stored in t he phone â s memory . Storin g multiple numbers and text it ems per name Y ou can use your phone as a con tact manager , since the ph one â s internal phone book allows you to store multiple phone numbers as well as text, such as an E -mail address, a street address or a note under a name. You can store up to 2 text items per name. The first number stored under a name is automatically set a s the default number . When you select a name from the phone book, e.g. to make a call or to send a message, the default number is used unless you se lect anoth er num ber . You can st ore u p to 5 number s pe r name .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 48 For each number or text item you can select a number type. If you do n ot select any number type, will be u sed as the number type. The default n umber is indicated by the box around th e number type icon, e.g. . Adding a new number or text item to a name: Multiple numbers can b e stored only in the p hone â s memo ry . Note: Before storing names and numbers, change the memory in use from SIM car d to Pho ne . For instructions, see â Selecting the phone bookâ on page 39. 1. Enter the names list, for example, by pressing or . 2. Scroll with or to the name to which you want to add a new number or text item and press D etails . 3. Pre ss Options and scroll to Add number or to Add text and press Select . 4. Scroll to one of the number or text types and press Select . Gene ral (def ault type when no other type is selected) Mobile Hom e Office Fa x Tex t t yp e s: E-ma il P ost al add. Note Y ou can later change the number or text t ype by using the Chan ge type option in the option list.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 49 Phone book 5. Enter the nu mber or enter the text and pres s OK to save it. 6. Press Opti ons (and then repeat steps 3 - 4) if you wish to continue adding numbers or text items to the na me. Press Back , and then Exit to e xit the phone book and to return to the standby mode. To change the default number: 1. Once in the names list, scroll to the desired nam e and press Details . 2. Scroll with or to the number you want to set as the default number , press Options . 3. Scroll to Set as d efault and press Select . Setting the type of view for stored names and numbers Y ou can set your phone to show the stored names and numbers in two different ways. 1. Press Names , scroll with or to Options and press Select . 2. Scroll to Ty pe of view and press Select . 3. Scroll to Name list (shows th ree names at a time) or Name & number (one name and phone number at a time ) and press OK . Service nu mbers By using this function you can easily dial any of the ser vice numbers your service provider may have stored in your SIM ca rd. This function is not displayed if there ar e no service numbers stored in your SIM card. 1. In the standby mode, press Names . 2. Scroll with or to Service No s. and press Select . 3. Scroll to the desired service number , press to call the number .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 50 Memor y status Y ou can check what percentage of the phone â s internal memory is in use or how many names and numbers are stored on the SIM card â s memory and how much m emory is still free. 1. When in the standby mode, press Names . 2. Scroll with or to Options and press Sele ct . 3. Scroll to Memory status and press Se lec t . The status of the SIM card is dis played. 4. Press or to see the status of the phone â s intern al me mory . â V oice dialling The voice dialling feature allows you to make phone calls by saying a voice tag that has been added to a desired phone number . Any spoken word(s) such as a person â s first name, surname and ty pe of number (e.g. m obile) can be a voice tag. Befor e us ing vo ice d ialli ng: ⢠Voice tags can be stored only in the phone â s memory . Save or copy the phone numbers, to which you want to add a voice tag, in your phone â s memo ry . ⢠When r ecording a voice tag or making a call by saying a voice tag, h old the phone in th e normal position near to you r ear . ⢠Voice ta gs are not language dependent. They are dependent on the speaker â s voice. ⢠Voice ta gs are sensitive to the background n oise; record voice tags in a quiet environment. ⢠Ve ry short names are not a ccepted; use long names and avoid similar n ames for different numbers. Note : The phone must be in a service area with adequate cellular signal str ength. Also, you must say the name exac tly as you said it when you recorded it. This may be difficult in , for example, a
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 51 Phone book noisy environment or du ring an emergen cy , so you should n ot rely solely upon voice dialling in all circumstances . Adding a voice ta g to a phone number V oice tags can only be added to the phone numbers stored in the ph one â s memory . First, change the memory in use from SIM card to Ph one , see â Selecting the phone book â on page 39 for instructions. Then, save a name and nu mber in the phone â s memory . 1. Press or to access the list of names. 2. Scroll with or to the name you w ant to add a voice tag to and press Details . 3. Scroll with or to select the number to which you want to add a voice tag. 4. Press Options and scroll with or to Add vo ice tag and press Select . 5. Press Start when the text Press Sta rt, then speak after to ne is displayed: The phone sounds a notification tone an d Please speak now is displayed. 6. Hold the phone near to your ear and say c learly the word(s) you want to r ecord as a voice tag after you hear the s tarting tone. 7. After recording the phone plays the r ecorded tag and Playi ng voic e tag is displa yed. If you do not want to save the recording, press Stop . 8. When the voice tag has been successfully saved, Voice tag saved is displayed and you can hear a beep. The voice tag is now stored in th e phone â s memory and the symbol appears above the phone number with the voice tag.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 52 Note : Only eight phone n umbers can have a voice tag. When the memory is f ull, delete some of th e voice tags. Ma kin g a ca ll b y u sin g a v oic e tag 1. In the standby mode , press and hold Names to start the voice dialling: A short tone is played an d Plea se spea k now is displayed. 2. Hold the phone in the normal position near to your ear and say the voice tag clearly . 3. The phone plays the name an d then automatically dials the number of the recognised voice tag after 1 .5 se conds. ⢠If th e text No voic e tags sa ved is displayed after you pr ess and hold Names , make sure that the phone â s memory is in use. Ma king a c all w hen us ing th e HDC- 9P he adse t 1. Press and hold the key on your headset: a short tone is played. 2. Say the voice tag clearly . 3. The phone plays th e recognised tag and then automatically dials the n umber of the recognised voice tag after 1.5 secon ds. Replaying, erasing or ch anging a v oice tag 1. In the standby mode , press Names to access the ph one book. 2. Scroll to Vo ice tag s and press Se lec t . Use scroll keys or to find the name with the voice tag you wish to replay , change or erase.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 53 Phone book To replay a voice tag: At the desired name, press Options , scroll to Play back and press Select . Hold the phone close to your ear to hear the voice tag. To erase a voice tag: At the desired name, pr ess Options , scroll to Erase and press Select . P ress OK when E rase voice tag? is displayed. To chang e a voice tag: ⢠At the desired name, press Opti ons , scroll to Change and press Select : Pres s start then speak after to ne is displayed. ⢠Press Start : The phone sounds a n otification tone and Please speak now is displayed. ⢠Say the new voice tag clearly . The phone r eplays the new voice tag and confirms that the new voice tag has been stor ed.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Us ing th e Menu 54 5. Using the Menu The phone offers a range of functions that allow you to t ailor the phone to your needs. These functions are arranged in men us and submenus. Most of the menu f unctions are provided with a brief help text. T o view the help text, scroll to the desired menu function an d wait for 15 secon ds. To exit the help text, pr ess Back . The menus and s ubmenus can be accessed by scrolling or by using th e shortcuts. â Accessing a menu function by scrolling 1. To access the menu facility , press Me nu . Press or to reach the desired main menu, e.g. Settings . Press Select to en ter the menu. 2. If the menu contains any submenus, fin d the one you w ant by scrolling with or . Press Select to enter the submenu (f or example Key lo ck set ti ng s ). 3. If the me nu you h ave s elected conta ins sub menus, r epeat step 2. Pre ss Select to enter the next submenu (for example Automa tic key lock ). 4. Press or to find the setting of you r choice and confirm the chosen setting. Tip: Y ou can return to th e previous menu level by pressing Back or exit the m enu without changing any settings by pressing and holding Bac k . Y ou can alw ays exit the menu without chan ging the menu settings by pr essing .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Us ing th e Menu 55 Us ing th e Menu â Accessing a menu function by us ing its shortcut number The menu items (menus, submenus and setting options) are numbered and can be accessed quickly by using their shortcut number . For menu shortcuts, see the list of menu fun ctions. 1. Press Menu . 2. Key in quickly , within two seconds, the index number of the menu function you want to access. For example, to set the Automatic keypad locking on: Press Menu , , and . ⢠Menu f or en terin g the menu ⢠for Settings ⢠for Keylock settings ⢠for Automatic keylock.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Us ing th e Menu 56 â List of menu functions 1. M essa ges 1. Write message 2. Inbox 3. Outbox 4. Arc hive 5. T emplates 6. My fol ders 7. Erase all 8. Mess age se tti ngs 2. C all reg ister 1. Missed calls 2. Recei ved calls 3. Dialled n umbers 4. Erase recent call lists 5. Call du ration 1. Last call duration 2. All calls â duration 3. Receive d calls â duration 4. Dialled calls â duration 5. Clear tim ers 6. Call costs 1. Last call units 2. All calls â units 3. Profile s 1. Gener al 1. Activa te 1. Contin uous 2. Timed 2. P ersonalise 1. Incom ing cal l aler t 2. Rin ging tone 3. Rin ging volume 4. Vibrating aler t 5. Message alert ton e 6. Keypa d tones 7. Warning tones 8. Alert for 2. Silent 1. Activa te 1. Contin uous 2. Timed 2. Personalise (sam e submenus as in Gener al) 3. Renam e 3. Meeting (same submenus as in Silent) 4. Outdoor (same submenus as in Silent)
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Us ing th e Menu 57 Us ing th e Menu 5. P ager (same submenus as in Silent) 6. Handsfre e 1 (same submenus as in General plus Automatic Answer and L ights) 7. Headset 2 (same submenus a s in General plus Automatic Answer.) 4. Settings 1. Call settings 1. Automatic volume control 2. Anykey answer 3. Automatic redial 4. Spee d dialling 5. Call w aiting service 6. Line for outgoing calls 3 7. Summary after call 8. Fax or data call 9. Own numb er sendi ng 2. Ph one settings 1. Langu age 2. Cell info display 3. Welcome note 4. Netw ork selection 5. Display con trast 6. Confirm SIM ser vice actions 3. Keylock settings 1. Automatic keylock 2. Keylock code 3. Change keylock 4. Communication settin gs 1. Info service 2. L isten to voice messages 3. Voice mailbox number 4. Service command editor 5. Security settings 1. PI N code request 2. Call barring service 3. Fixed dialling 4. Closed u ser group 5. Security level 6. Change of access codes 1. C hange security code 2. C hange PIN code 3. C hange PIN2 code 4. C hange barring pas sword 6. Restore factory settin gs 1. Profile is shown only if the phone is or has been used with the CARK1 1 1 car kit. Activation of the profile is automatic. 2. Profile is shown only if the phone is or has been used with the HDC-9P headset. Activation of the profile is automatic. 3. If your SIM car d does not support Line for out going calls function, the numbering of Summary afte r call, Fax and data call and Own number sending changes.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Us ing th e Menu 58 5. C all div ert 1. Divert all voice calls 2. Divert if busy 3. Divert if no t answe red 4. Divert if out of reach 5. Divert if not available 6. Divert all f ax calls 7. Divert all data calls 8. Cancel all diverts 6. G ames 1. Snake II 2. Opposite 3. P airs II 4. Setti ngs 7. C alcul ator 8. C alen dar 9. Ta sk journal 1. Restart 2. Add ne w 1 3. Find 4. Edit 5. Erase 6. History 10 . Cl o ck 1. Stopwatch 2. Alarm clock 3. Time setting s 1 1. Sound meter 12.Infrared 13. Services 1. Home 2. Bookmarks 3. Settings 4. Go to addr ess 5. C lear the cache 14.SIM serv ices 2 1. This is the only menu item shown if there are no previous tasks in the Task list. 2. Only shown if supported by your SIM card. The name and contents vary depending on the SIM card.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 59 Menu functions 6. Menu functions â Messages (Menu 1) Within the Messag es menu you can read, write and send text messages of up to 160 ch aracte rs or save your own message s in the folder s for later use . Note : The message centre number is often stored to your SIM card, but if it â s not, yo u need to sto re it inthe Message centre number option under Me ssage sett ings before you are able to sen d or receive any mess ages. Contact your se rvice provide r for the messag e centre numbe r . Writing a nd sendi ng text mess ages Within the Write me ssage menu you can write and edit text messages of up to 160 characters. Y ou can use: ⢠traditional text in put, indicated by To insert a character , you need to press the key labelled with the required letter as many times as is necessa ry . For more information, see â Storing names and n umbers â on page 4 1. ⢠predictive text input, indicated by . When writing complete words, for inserting a characte r you need to press the key with the corresponding letter on ly once. 1. In the standby mode, press Menu , pres s Select when Messa ges is displayed. 2. Press Select whe n Wri te m es sag e is displayed. 3. Key in a messa ge.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 60 Tip: When writing a text message, the phone uses the tex t case, which automatically writes the first character of a senten ce in upper case. Y ou can also insert templates (see â Standard answers and templates â on page 63) and pictures (see â Inserting pictures â on page 63) in to your messages. 4. To send the messa ge, press Options . 5. Pre ss Select when Send is highlighted. The option list includes options for sending, saving and erasing the mess age you are writing. Tip: Y ou can also send the messa ge by pres sing after you hav e writ ten it. 6. Enter the recipient â s phon e number , or recall the phone n umber from phone book by pressing Search . Find the desired number and press OK . 7. Pre ss OK to send th e message. Predictive text input Predictive text input allows you to key in any characters by single keypress es when writing complete words. This text in put is based on a bu ilt-in dictionary to which you can add new words. Selecting the language for predicti ve text input 1. Pre ss Menu , pres s Select when Message s is displayed. 2. Pre ss Select when Wri te m es sag e is displayed. 3. Pre ss Options and scroll to Diction ary and press Select . Note : Predictive text input is only available for the languages listed in the dictionary option list.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 61 Menu functions 4. Scroll to the desired l anguage and press Select . T9 dict ionary activa ted is displayed and the predictive text input is now on, indicated by . Y ou can change from the predictive text input to the traditional text input by pressing Options and scrolling to Dic t ion ary . Select Diction ary off and press Select .. T9 di ctiona ry de activ ated is displayed. Tip: Press and hold Options to qu ickly activate or de-activate the predictive text input. Alternatively , press twice. Writing wo rds wit h predictiv e text i nput 1. Start writing a word by using the keys to . Press each key only once for on e letter when writing complete words. For ex ampl e, to wr ite hello with the English dictionary selected: The word changes af ter each keystroke - ignore how the word appe ars on the display before you have keyed in all its ch aracters. ⢠To delete a ch aracter , press Clear . ⢠To change the ch aracter case, press . ⢠To change between letter and n umber mode, press and hold . ⢠To in sert a word , pr ess Options . Scroll to Inse rt word and press Select . Wr ite the word an d press Save .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 62 ⢠To insert a s ingle number in character mode, press a nd hold the respective number key . ⢠To insert several nu mbers, press Options . Scroll to Insert number and press Sel ect . Key in the desired numbers and press OK . ⢠To insert a s ymbol, press and hold . Select the desired symbol a nd press Use Alternatively , press Options , scroll to Ins ert symb ol , and press Select . Scr oll to the desired symbol and press Use . 2. When you have finished writing the word and it is correct, confirm it by pressing or adding a space with . 3. If the word is correct, start wr iting the next word. If the wor d is not correct, you h ave the following options: ⢠Press repeatedly until the desired word appears and confirm it. ⢠Press Options , scroll to Next match and press Select . Nex t match is shown in the editor . If the ? character is displayed after the word, the w ord you intended to write is not in the dictionary . To a dd the word to the dictionary , press Spell . Addi ng the de sired wo rd to the m atch lis t 1. If no ma tches are found in the predictive text input mode, you can insert a new word into the dictionary . Press Spell and key in the desired word u sing traditional text input. 2. Pre ss Save . Note: When the dictionary is full, the new word replaces the least u sed word in it. Writing compound word s 1. Key in the first part of the word and accept it by pressing .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 63 Menu functions 2. Write the last part of the com pound word and accept the word by pressing or . Stand ard an swer s and te mpl ates Y our phone offers you a list of standard answers and templates that you can use in replying to messages. Y ou can also use templates when writing messages. Y ou can find th e list of default templates in the Templ a te s folder of the Messag es menu. Y o u can edit the text message templates to your liking, but the original templates will be r estored when the Menu 4-6 is sel ected ( Res tore factory settings ). To inser t a temp late: 1. When i n Wri te me ssa ge menu, press Options . 2. Scroll to Ins ert template and press Select . 3. Scroll to the desired template and press Select . The icon is displayed in front of text message templates. The icon is displayed in front of picture message templates. Inse rtin g pict ure s Y ou r phone offers you 1 0 picture message templates. You can also save new picture templates into the Tem pl a te s folder. More templates can be found on th e Nokia we bsite (http://www .club.nokia.com). Note: This function can be used only if it is supported by your network ope rator or service provider. Only phones that offer the picture messages f eature can receive and display picture message. To insert a picture in a text me ssage: 1. When in the message editor , press Options . 2. Scroll to Attach picture and press Select . The list of picture message templates is displayed.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 64 3. Scroll with or to the desir ed picture message template and press Select to view it. Note : Picture templates have default titles but you can change them by selecting the option Rename and keying in th e new title. 4. To insert the picture into your message, press Use . When th e picture h as been at tached to your message, the text Picture atta ched is displayed and the ph one returns to the message editor . The indicator means that the picture has been attached. The nu mber of characters that you can enter in a picture m essage depends on the size of the picture. 5. If you want to see the text and the picture together before sending the message, press Opti ons , scroll to Pr eview and press Select . If you want to change the attached picture, select the option Repl ace pic ture . If yo u want to remove the attached picture, select the option Remove picture . 6. To send the messa ge, press Options and select the option Send . ⢠Note that each p icture message is made up of several text m essages. Therefore, sending one picture message may cost m ore than s ending one text me ssage. ⢠Since picture me ssages are saved in the phoneâ s m emory , you can not view them if you use the SIM card with another ph one. Reading and view ing text and pictur e message s When you ha ve received a text or pictu re message, the indicator and the number of n ew messages followed by Message(s) received will appear on the display . 1. Pre ss Show to view the m essage or press Exit to view it later .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 65 Menu functions To read the te xt message l ater: Once in th e Messa ges menu, scroll to Inbox and press Open . Scroll to the desired message and press Select to read it. An unread text message is indicated by the icon in front of it. The message is stored in the Inbox folder after you have read it. To view t he picture mes sage la ter: Once in th e Messa ges menu, scroll to Inbox and press Open . Scroll to the desired message and press Select to view it. An unviewed picture message is indicated by the icon in front of it. 2. While reading and viewing the message, press Opt ions to scroll through the list of option s and press Select at the highlighted option to select it. The option list includ es options for erasing, replying, f orwarding, moving, editing, and ren aming the message you are reading. Y ou can also chan ge the font size of the message you are reading. ⢠Note that wh en you are replying to a picture message, only the text is copied to your reply message. When you a re editing a picture message, only the text can be edited, not the picture. ⢠If you want to save the picture for later use select the option Sav e picture : the picture is saved in the Temp l at e s folder . Y ou can also copy th e message to your phone â s calendar as a remin der note ( Copy to cal. ). The Details option shows you, e.g., the sender â s name and phone num ber , message centre used for sending, reception date and time. If you want to extract numbers from the current message, use the option Use number , or press . Replyi ng to a messa ge 1. Once in a message you want to reply to, press Opt ions , scroll to Reply or to Re ply ( text ) if you are replying to a picture m essage, and press Select .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 66 2. Scroll to one of the following reply ty pes and press Select . ⢠Empty screen. Original message is not included in the reply message. ⢠Orig . mess age. Ori ginal message is included in the reply message. ⢠Standard answers, e.g. Ye s , Thank you or Congratulatio ns . Only the selected sta ndard answer is included in the reply message. The standard answer can also be modified and additional text can be added. ⢠Template . T he selected template is included in th e beginning of the reply message. The template text can be modified and additional text ca n be added. 3. If y ou select ed Te mp la te , the list of templates, including e.g. Please c all or See you in , is displayed. Scroll to the desire d template and press Select . 4. Write your reply messa ge and press Options , scroll to Send and pr ess Select . Press OK to send the message to the displayed number. Special sending opt ions Sending a text mes sage to mult iple reci pients Y ou can send a message to multiple recipients. When sending a reply messa ge, use the Multiple copies option under Forw . o ptions , and when writing and sending a message, use Mult iple copies unde r Send optio ns . 1. Afte r you have wr itten the message, p ress Options , scroll to Send options and press Se le ct . 2. Scroll to Mult iple copies and pr ess Select : the list of names is displayed. 3. Scroll to the desired name a nd press OK to send the message. 4. Then select the next recipient and pr ess OK .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 67 Menu functions 5. When you do n ot want to send the mess age to any more recipients, pr ess Don e . Send ing a text message by messag e profil e Y ou can send or forward a text message, for example to a fax number, by using the Messag e profile option under Se nd option s or under Forw . options if th is profile is supported by you r network. For example, in order to send a text message to a f ax, you first need to define one message profile under the mess age settings for fax transmission s. See â Message settings â on pa ge 69. 1. Afte r you hav e writte n the messa ge, sel ect Messa ge profile . 2. Scroll to the message profile you have defined for fax transmissions and press Select . 3. Enter the fax numb er or recall it from the phone book an d press OK . Tip: If you ha ve stor ed the fax nu mber und er the Default r ecipient number setting of the selected message profile, the phone automatically s uggest that number . Press OK to accept the number . Organisin g your messages All the messages s tored in your phone â s message memory a re organised in folders. Inbox and Out box fo lder s After you have read an incoming text or picture message, the phone stores the message in the Inbox folder of the Me ssages men u. When you save a messag e you have written and/or sent, the phone stores the messa ge in the Ou tbo x folder . Note: The blinking icon indicates that the message memory is full. Before you can receive new messages, delete some of your old messages.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 68 Archive folder a nd user-specified folders If you want to ma ke sure that certain me ssages will not be overwritten when the m essage memory becomes full, or if you want to further organi se your messages, you can move some of your messages to the Arch ive folder or you can add new folders under the Me ssages men u and store some of you r messages there. Adding a folder: 1. Onc e in t he Message s menu, scroll to My fo lders and press Open . 2. Pre ss Options a nd scroll to Add folder and press Select . Enter the name of the new folder and pr ess OK . Dele ting the con tents of a single f older or of all the fold ers: 1. Onc e in t he Message s menu, scroll to Er ase all and press Select . 2. Do either of the following: Scroll to the folder whose con tents you want to delete and press OK . Th en pr ess OK at the prompt Erase all r ead messages from folder? Or Scroll to All read and press OK to erase all read m essages from all the f olders. Then press OK at th e prompt Erase all read messages from folder? Del eting a fo lder: 1. Onc e in t he Message s menu, scroll to My fo lders and press Open . 2. Scroll to the folder you want to delete and press Options . 3. Scroll to Remove fold er and press Sel ect . Note : When you delete a f older , all the messages con tained in that folder are also deleted.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 69 Menu functions Movi ng or eras ing a text or pi cture me ssage: 1. Once in the desired message, press Options . 2. Scroll to Move or to Erase and press Sel ect . 3. If you want t o move a message, scroll to the selected folder name and pres s OK . Message se ttings To access the message s ettin gs list: 1. Once in t he Messa ges menu, scroll to Mess age se ttings and press Se lect . 2. Scroll to the settin g you want to set a nd press Select . There are two kinds of message settings in your phone: message profile specific s ettings and settings common to all text messages. A message profile is a group of settings needed for sending text messages. The ph one uses the settings Message centre number , Mess ages se nt as and Message validity und er the Mess age set tings me nu as a default message profile if you do not select another set when sending a message. When, for examp le, you reply to a text message and select Send or when you wr ite a text me ssage and sel ect Send , th e phone automatically uses the default message profile. Y ou can also send a text message to a fax or to an e-mail address (if supported by your service provider) if you have defined a m essage profile with proper settings for fax or e-mail transmissions. See also â Special sending optionsâ on page 66. Setti ngs co mmon to all text mes sages The following message settings under the Messa ge setting s menu are common to all outgoing text messages, irrespective of th e selected set.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 70 ⢠Delivery reports Y ou can request the network to s end delivery reports on your text messages ( network service). A delivery report is indicated by in front of the m essage header . ⢠Reply to you via same centre This network service a llows the recipient of your text message to send you a reply message via your text message ce ntre. Sett ing for M essa ge p rofil es 1 Within the Messa ge profiles submenu of the Mes sage setting s you can change the settings of a particular message profile 2 . Each of the m essage profiles has its own submenu w ith the following functions: ⢠Message centre number With this submenu you can store the pho ne number of the messa ge centre needed for sending text messa ges. ⢠Mess ages se nt as For normal text messages, select the option Tex t , for fax transmission, select th e option Fax , etc. Note that you can only use the options Fa x , E-mail an d Pa g i n g , if your messaging service offers the facility to convert the text m essages into these alternative formats. Contact your service provider for availability of this function. 1. The message profiles menu is only displayed if your SIM card supports more than one set. Each set appears in its own submenu and may have any name. 2. The number of sets depends on how many set s your SIM card offers.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 71 Menu functions ⢠Message vali dity This network ser vice allows you to set the l ength of time that your text m essages are stored at the message centre while attempts are m ade to deliver them. ⢠Default recipient number The phone will suggest the number store d under this option as a default number for text message sending when this message prof ile is selected. ⢠Messa ge profile name Allows you to rename each message profile. â Call register (Menu 2) Within this menu you can view and delete phone numbers registered by th e phone, and view the approximate length and c ost of your calls (network serv ice) . In the options of th e missed calls, received calls or dialled numbers you can: ⢠call the number ⢠save the number in the phone book ⢠view the date and t ime of the call ⢠view , e dit or erase th e number f rom the list Note: The phone registers m issed and received calls only if the network supports Calling Line Identification (CLI), and th e phone is switched on and within the networ k â s service area.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 72 Missed calls ( Menu 2-1) This function allows you to view a list of the last ten phone numbers from which somebody has tried to call you with n o success (network ser vice). Tip : When a note about missed calls is being displayed, press List to see the phone number . To call back immediately , press . Received call s (Menu 2-2) This function allows you to view a list of the ten phone numbers from which you have most recently accepted calls (network service). Diall ed number s (Menu 2- 3) This function allows you to view a list of th e ten phone number s that you have most r ecently dialled, i.e. call ed or tried to ca ll. Tip: To quickly access the list of last dialled numbers, pre ss once when the phone is in the standby mode. Erase recent call li sts (Menu 2-4) This function allows you to delete all the phone numbers which appear in Menus 2-1 â Missed calls â , 2- 2 â Received callsâ and 2- 3 â Dialled numbersâ . Thes e phon e numb ers are also er ased wh en yo u: ⢠switch on the phone with a SIM ca rd inserted that is not on e of the five SIM cards used m ost recently with the ph one.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 73 Menu functions ⢠change the â Security levelâ setti ng (Menu 4- 5-5). Call duration (Me nu 2-5) This function allows you to view the duration of your in coming and outgoing calls in h ours, minutes and seconds. Y ou can also (by f irst entering the security code) clear the call timers. See â Access codes â on page 122. Note : The actual time invoiced for c alls by your service provider may var y , depending upon network features, roun ding-off for billing, and so forth. Call costs (Menu 2-6) This network service allows you to check the cost of your last call or all calls. The call costs are shown separately for each SIM card.Y ou can limit the costs of your calls to a certain a mount of charging units or units of currency by using the option Call cost limit . Y ou can make and receive charged calls as long as the specified cost limit is not exceeded. The number of remaining units is shown in the standby mode. Y ou m ay need the PIN2 code to set the cost limit.Y ou can set the phone to show the remaining talk-time (cost limit) in terms of charging units or un its of currency by using the option Show cost . Y ou may need the PIN 2 code to select th e currency or u nit. Contact your serv ice provider for charging un it prices.The option Clear counter s allows you to reset the call cost counters. To clear th e counters you need the PIN2 code. See â Access codes â on page 122. Note : When no more charging or currency uni ts are left, on ly calls to the emer gency number programmed into your ph one (e.g. 1 1 2 or other official number) may be possible. The actual time in voiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depending upon network features, roun ding-off for billing, and so forth.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 74 â Profiles (Menu 3) Within the Pr ofiles menu, you can adjust and cu stomise the phone tones for different events, environments and caller groups. Mos t profiles can also be set on for a certain period of time. Note: You can also change the profile by pressing the power key and selecting the requ ired profile with the scroll keys. It is not possible to select Timed profiles via pressing the power key . Acti vating a us er prof ile If you want to change t he currently selected profile ( Gener al as defa ult): 1. Press quickly in sta ndby mode. 2. Scroll with or to the profile you want to activa te and press OK . OR 1. Pre ss Menu , scroll to Profile s and press Select . Sc roll with and to the profile you want to activate and press Options . Confirm the activation of the profile with OK . 2. Select Continuous if you want to activate the selected profile f or an indefinite time. The chosen profile remains active until you activate another profile. 3. Or se lect Timed if you want to set a n expiry time for the profile (within the next 24 hours). In standby mode a timed profile is displayed with a c lock indicator . Note : Y ou must set the phone â s c lock before you can time a profile. See â Set the time (Menu 1 0- 3- 2) â on page 1 0 7. 4. Enter the value in hours and minutes after Expiry time . 5. Confirm the given time value w ith OK .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 75 Menu functions Note: If you switch the phone off or connect it to t he car kit or to the headset the timed profile is terminated. Customising Profiles 1. Press Menu , scroll to Pr ofiles and press Select . The following list of options appears: Ge neral , Silent , Mee ting , Outdoor , Pa ge r , Handsfree , He adset . Note: Handsfr ee and Headset will not appear in the Profiles list unless the CARK1 1 1 car kit or the HDC-9P headset are connected to your phone. However , the settings for the Hands free and Headse t will remain in the menu once connected. 2. Scroll to the desired p rofile and press Options . 3. Select Pe rs onalis e and press OK . Note: When the phone is connected to the car kit CARK1 1 1 or to the headset HDC-9P , the Ac tivate function will not be available. 4. Scroll to the settin g you want to customise an d press Select . 5. Scroll to the desired o ption and press OK . Sett ings y ou ca n pers onal ise Once you have selected the option Per sonalise , you can customise the f ollowing settings of the selected profile: ⢠Incoming call alert to define how the phone notifies you of an incoming voice call. T he options are: Ringing , Asce nding , Ring once , Beep once and Off . When Incoming ca ll alert is set to Off , no ringing tone or other alert tones will be heard. This silent mode is indicated by , however , in Silent and Meeting profiles only .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 76 ⢠Ringing tone to set the ringing tone type for voice calls. Tip: Y ou can also receive ringing tones via O TA. Y ou can store five ringing tones at a time in the ringing tone list. ⢠Ringing volume to set the volume level for the ringing and message aler t tones. ⢠Vibrat ing alert to set the phone to vibrate at an incoming voice call and at incoming text me ssage. The vibrating alert does not work when the phone is connected to a charger or desktop stand. ⢠Mess age alert tone to set the ringing tone type f or text messages. ⢠Keypad t ones to set the volume level for keypad tones or to set the keypad tones off . ⢠War ni ng t one s to set the warning tones on or off. For example, when set to on, th e phone sounds a warning tone when th e battery is running o ut of power . ⢠Auto matic answer (i n Handsfre e and Headse t profiles only) to set the ph one to answer an incoming voice call after a few seconds. Note : This function can only be used when your phone is connected to a headset or to a car kit equipped with the ignition sense option, with the ignition switched on . ⢠Alert for to set the phone to ring only upon calls from ph one numbers which belong to a selected caller group. Use the scroll keys or to reach the desired group and press Mark . To set a ringing tone and a group gr aphic for a caller group, see page 4 5. Rena ming profi les Y ou can rename the profiles to your perso nal liking except for the General , Hand sfree and Heads et profiles.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 77 Menu functions 1. Press Menu , scroll with or to Profiles and press Select . 2. Scroll to the profile you want to rename and press Options , then scroll to Rename and press OK . 3. Enter the n ew name and press OK . To enter letters, se e â Storing names and numbers â on page 4 1. â Settings (Menu 4) Call settings (Menu 4-1) Automat ic volum e control (Menu 4-1- 1) Automatic volume con trol (AVC) controls the earpiece â s volume level according to the environment noise level. If the environmental noise and/or level of received speech increases or decreases, AVC changes also the earpiece â s volume level accordingly and keeps the volume at a right level respectively . Automatic volume control can be activated by u sing menus or you can select it du ring an active call. Note: AVC on/ AVC off setting du ring an active call affects only the current call. Note: The usage of Automatic volume control is possible only in handportable mode. If you are using the phone in any other modes (for example in Headset mode or in Handsfree mode) the options AVC on/ AVC off ca nnot be selected during a call under Opti ons or th rough t he me nu. Activating Auto matic volume control via a menu 1. Press Menu , first select Settings , then Call settings . 2. Select Au to mat ic vo lu me co nt rol . 3. Choose e ither Off or On . The default is Off .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 78 Activating Automatic volume co ntrol during a call 1. Pre ss Options during an active call. 2. Select AVC on if you want to activate the AVC or select AVC o ff if you want to turn the automatic volume control off. If you increase the volu me level during an active call by pressing , the phone â s volume level increases regardless of AVC bein g on or off. When you end the call, the volu me level returns to th e level previous to AVC adjustment. Note: If AVC has changed the volume leve l and you deactivate the AVC du ring a call, the volume level stays at the level the AVC has adjusted it to. Anykey answer (Menu 4-1-2) When this function is set on, you can answer an incoming call by pressing any key briefly, except and . T he facility to answer a call by pressing Reject is not available when th is function is on. Automatic redial (M enu 4-1-3) When this function is set on, your phone will make up to ten attempts to connect the call after an unsucces sful call at tempt. Speed dial ling (Menu 4-1-4) When this function is set to on, the names and pho ne numbers assigned to the speed dial ke ys to can be dialled by pressing and holding the corresponding number key . Note that pr essing and holding the key dials your voice mailbox number . Call wait ing service (Menu 4-1-5) When this network ser vice is activated, the networ k will notify you of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress. See â Call waiting â on page 37.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 79 Menu functions Line for outg oing call s (Menu 4-1-6) The SIM card may be used with two subscriber numbe rs i.e. with two phone lines. With in the menu 4- 3-5, you can select the desired line for making calls. Y ou can also prevent the line selection. For more information on availability , contact you r network operator or service provider . If you select line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you w ill not be able to make calls. However , calls on both lines can be answered regardless of the selecte d line. Y ou can prevent th is menu function from being used by selecting the option Lock from the option list. Tip: You can switch from one line to the other by pressing and holding in the standby mode. Summary after cal l (Menu 4-1- 7) When you set this f unction to on, the phone will briefly display th e approximate duration and cost (network service) of the las t call. Fax or da ta ca ll (Men u 4- 1-8) Within this menu, you can make a fax or data call. Before using this function you need to activate the IR port of your phon e within the Menu 9 or to con nect your phone to a compatible device (for example, a fax machine). Own number sending (Men u 4-1-9) This network service allows you to set your phone number either to be dis played or hidden from the person you are calling. Set by network resets the phone to the default setting, On or Off , that y ou have agreed upon with your service provider .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 80 Note: The numbering of the Summary after call , Fa x or dat a call and Own n umber sending menus may vary depending on whether your SIM c ard supports the Line for outgoing calls function or not. Phone set tings (Menu 4-2) Language (Menu 4-2-1) Within this menu you can select the language in which the display te xts will be shown. If the settin g Auto matic is selected, the language used is chosen based on the current SIM car d. Language setting also affects the time and date formats of the following functions: A larm cl ock (Menu 10 - 2 ), Time settin gs (Menu 1 0-3), Calendar (Menu 8), Task j o ur na l (Menu 9). Cell info d isplay (Men u 4-2-2) This network service allows you to set the phone to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on Micro Cellular Netw ork (MCN) technology (networ k service). Welcome note (Menu 4-2-3) This menu allows you to set the message that is shown briefly when the ph one is switched on. Network selection ( Menu 4-2-4) The network to which you are connected can be selected either automatically or manually . In Automatic mode the phone automatically selects one of the cellular networks availa ble in your area; the selected network can be GSM900 or GSM1800. In Manual mode the phone will show a list of the available networks and you ca n select the network you wish to use if th is network has a roaming agreement with your home network operator . If no su ch agreement is in force , the text No access will be displayed a nd you must select an other network. The
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 81 Menu functions phone will stay in manual mode until the automatic mode i s selected or another SIM card is in serted into the phone. Display contrast (Menu 4 -2-5) Y ou can adjust the display contrast with this menu. There are ten (1 0) possible contrast levels. 1. Select Displa y cont rast under Ph one sett ings . 2. Adjust the displa y contrast by scrolling with or . The contrast bar on the ph one â s display indicates the actual display contrast. Confirm SIM service actions (Menu 4-2-6) Within this men u you can set the phone to s how you the confirmation messages sen t between your phone and the network w hen you are using the SIM services by sel ecting the option Asked . See â SIM services (Menu 14 ) â on page 1 19. Key lock settings (Menu 4-3) When the keypad is lock ed, appears at the top of the display . Note: When the Keypad lock is on, calls may be possible to the e mergency number programmed into your phone, (e.g. 1 12 or other official number ). Automati c keylock (M enu 4-3-1) The automatic keypad lock is a user selectable feature. It functions in principle like a screen saver on your PC. Y ou can set time delay and when that time is up the keypad is locked automatically preventing accidental keypresses.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 82 1. Select On if you want to select the automatic keypad lock. 2. Give the time entry in minutes and seconds after De lay time appears on th e display . The def ault is 01:00. The ma ximum ti me entry fo r the dela y is 60 min utes an d the mini mum entry 10 s e c o n d s . The automatic keyguard activates if: ⢠phone is in standby mode and a user selectable time delay expires. Keylo ck code (Menu 4-3-2) Y ou can use keylock code to prevent the unauthorised use of your phone. The default code is 0000. Note: Before activating the keylock code make sure that the PIN code request is als o set on. If you set the keylock code by pressing On this is confirmed with the note K eylock code activated . Y ou need to e nter the required code in the standby mode to u nlock the keypad. Note: To unlock your keypad, press in standby mode Unlo ck and then key in the four-digit keylock code. If you enter an incorrect keylock code five times in succession, the ph one prompts you to en ter the PIN code instead. After entering the PIN code, you can cha nge your keylock code (Menu 4-3-3). Change keylo ck code ( Menu 4-3-3) If you want to change the old or default code to a new one, use this submenu. 1. Enter the new four-digit keylock code and press OK . 2. V erify the given code. Note: Despite the keylock code you ca n answer a call and use other keys as usual during the call. The keypad lock is reactivated once the call is finished.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 83 Menu functions If you want to take the default code into use again, you must select R estore factory sett ings (Menu 4- 6). Commun icati on sett ings (Menu 4-4) Info s ervic e (M enu 4- 4-1) This network service allows you to receive messages on various topics (such as weather or traffic conditions) from your service provider . For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact you r service provider . By setting this menu to On , you will receive messages on th e active topics. Y ou can edit the list of topics, and mark a topic active or inactive. To pic inde x retrieves a list of available topics from the network. By selecting Top ic s , you can add a topic into the topics list. Key in the topic number and name. Y ou can also edit or erase the topic list. Select La nguag e to set the language f or the messages. Only messa ges in the selected language ar e show n. Tip: Y ou can save info service messages in the Archive folder or in one of the user-specif ied folders. Listen to voice messages (Menu 4- 4-2) When you enter this submenu, the phone automatically calls your voice mailbox at the phone number stored in Menu 4-4-3. Note that the voice mailbox is a network service an d you may need to subscribe to it first. When the display text abov e the left selection key is OK , press the key t o call your voice mailbox number.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 84 Tip: To quickly call your voice mailbox, press and h old when in the standby mode or in menus. V oice mailbox num ber (Menu 4-4-3) Within this submenu, you can stor e and edit your voice mailbox number . V oice mailbox is a network service. For more information and for the voice mailbox number , contact your service provider . Ser vice comma nd edit or ( Menu 4 -4-4 ) From this submenu you can send service requests (als o known as USSD commands ), for example activation of network services commands, to your service provider . For more information, contact your service provider . Securi ty settings (Menu 4-5 ) Y our phone is equipped with a versatile security sys tem to prevent unauthorised use of the phone or the SIM card. See also â Access codes â on page 122. PIN co de r eques t ( Men u 4- 5-1) Y ou can protect your SI M card by setting the phone to ask for your PIN code every time the phone is switched on. To do this, you need to set the me nu PIN c ode reques t to On . You will need the PIN code to turn this request function on. The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card. I f not, contact your service provider . Y ou can change your PIN code in the Change of access codes m enu (4-5-6). Note: If you enter an incorrect PIN code th ree times in succession, the SIM card is blocked and you need to enter the PUK code to unblock the SIM card. See â Access codes â on page 122. Note: Some SI M cards do not allow th e PIN code request to b e turned off.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 85 Menu functions Call bar ring service (Menu 4-5-2) This network service allows you to restrict incoming calls to and outgoing calls from your phone. A barring password is required for using this function. Y ou can select on e of the following call restrictions: ⢠Outgoing calls to bar a ll outgoing calls. ⢠International calls to bar all calls to abroad when in the h ome country . ⢠International calls except to home co untry to bar all international calls except to calls to th e home country when a broad. ⢠Incoming calls to bar all incoming calls. ⢠Incoming calls when abr o ad to bar all incoming calls when abroad. For each of th e above settings you can select Activate , Cance l or Check status (to show barred call types). Within the submenu Cancel all barrings you can cancel a ll call restrictions. Note : When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain emerge ncy numbers in some networks (e.g. 1 12 or other offi cial emergency number) . Fixed diall ing (Me nu 4-5- 3) This service restricts your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers, if th is function is supported by your SIM card. To save and edit the numbers on the list, you will need to h ave the PIN2 code. Note : When Fixed Dial Option is se t on, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 1 12 or other official emergency number).
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 86 Closed user group ( Menu 4-5-4) This network service specifies the group of people whom you can call a nd who can call you. Pr eset resets the phone to use a user group the SIM card owner has agreed upon with the service provider . A closed user g roup is indicated by the icon . For further in formation contact your networ k operator or service provider . Note: When calls are limited to Closed User G roups, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks ( e.g. 1 1 2 or other official emergency number). Security level (Menu 4-5 -5) Y ou can protect your phone again st unauthorised use with the security code (security code). To do this, you need to set the menu function Security level to Phone or Memory . When set to Phon e , the phone will ask for the security code when the SIM card inserted is not one of the five SIM cards used most recently with the phone. When set to Memor y , the security code is required to enter the phone â s internal phone book.The security code is also required for using some functions, for example, to clear a phone book or to restore the factory settings.The security code is usually supplied with the phone (on an identification sticker). If not, contact your local dealer. The factory setting for the security code is 12345. Chan ge the code w ithin t he men u 4-5 -6 Change of ac cess co des . Keep the new code secret and in a safe place which is separate from the phone. Note: If you enter an incorrect security code five times in succession, the phone is blocked and will not accept the correct security code for the next five minutes. Tip: You can also restrict calls made from or to your phone if supported by your network. See also Call barring service (4-5 -2), Fi xed dial ling ( 4-5-3 ) a nd Closed u ser gr oup (4-5 -4) in the Settings section
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 87 Menu functions Note : When you change the security level, all the recent calls lists a re cleared. Change o f access codes ( Menu 4-5-6) With this menu you can change the access codes: security code, PIN code, PIN2 code and barring password. These codes can on ly include the characters 0 to 9. The phone pr ompts you to enter the current code and th e new code. It also prompts you to verify the new code by entering it again. Note : Avoid using a ccess codes similar to the emergency numbers, such as 1 12, to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number . Rest ore fa ctory settin gs (Me nu 4-6 ) Y ou can reset some of the menu settings to their original values. The security code is n eeded for this function. â Call divert (Menu 5) This network service allows you to direct your incoming ca lls to another number (for example, to your voice mailbox number). For details, contact your service provider . Within the Menu 5 you can select one of the following diverts: ⢠Divert al l voice calls. All voice calls are diverted and no ringing tone is played at an incoming call. ⢠Divert if busy . Voice calls are diverted when your number is busy . Tip: If Di vert if busy is activated, rejecting an incoming call will also divert the call.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 88 ⢠Diver t if not answer ed . V oice calls are diverted when you don â t answer a call w ithin the pre-set timeout. ⢠Divert if out of r each . V oice calls are diverted when your phone is switched off or outside of the network service area. ⢠Divert if not available . Voice calls are diverted when your number is busy , when you don â t answer a call, and when your phone is switched off or outside of the n etwork service area. ⢠Divert all fax calls . All fax calls are diverted. ⢠Divert all data calls . All data calls are diverted. Select the option Activate to set the divert setting on if allowed by the network, Ca ncel to set the divert setting off or Check status to check whet her the divert is activated or not. To cancel all diverts, select the submen u Cancel all diverts . Tip: The icon is shown in the standby mode when you have activated the Divert a ll voice call s . If you have two phone lines, the divert icon for your first line is and f or the second line is . â Games (Menu 6) Y our phone offers you three games to play : Snake II , Op posite and Pa i rs I I . Setti ngs allow you to set the lights and sounds on or off for a game. Note: Y our phone must be switched on to use this f unction. Do not switch on the phone when the use of a wireless phone is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 89 Menu functions To s ta r t a n ew ga m e 1. Press Menu , scroll to Game s and pr ess Select . 2. In Pa i r s I I , s elect first either Time trial or Puzzle and then the option New gam e . In Oppo site , select the op tion New g ame and in Snake I I sel ect th e 1 play er option. T o star t a 2-p layer game Y ou can also play Snake II as a 2-player game via the IR port of your phone with a person who has the same game on a compatible phone. Bef ore starting the 2-player game, ensure that the IR ports of th e two phones are pointing at each other . See â Infrared ( Menu 12) â on page 10 9. To start the game both play ers should select the option 2 players . Game op tions ⢠New game starts a new game session. ⢠Level allows you to set the le vel of difficulty for th e selected game. Select the desired le vel with or and press OK . ⢠Inst ructi ons shows a help text on how to play the game. Scr oll through the text with or . ⢠Top sc o re shows the highest score (in Snake II an d Pai rs II only). ⢠Continue allows you to resume a paused game. ⢠Last v iew shows the final view of th e game immediately after the game has ended.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 90 â Calculator (Menu 7) The calculator in your phone adds, su btracts, multiplies, divides, and converts currency values. This calculator has a limited accuracy and rounding errors may occur , especially in long divisions. Note: Y our phone must be switched on to u se this function. Do not switch on the ph one when the use of a wireless phone is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . Using the ca lculator 1. Pre ss Menu , scroll to Calcu lator , and press Select . 2. Whe n â 0â is displayed on the scr een, enter the first number in the calculation. To change the sign, press Options , scroll to Change sign and press Select . To a dd a decimal, press . 3. To add, press once ( will appear). To s ubtract, press twice (- will appear) . To multiply , press three tim es (* will appear). To divide, pr ess four times (/ will appear). Alternatively , press Options , scroll to the desired option s, and press Select . 4. Enter the second numb er . R epeat these st eps as many tim es as neces sary . Pr ess Clear to erase any mista kes. 5. For a total, pr ess Options . Scroll to Equals and press Select . 6. To star t a new calculation, first press an d hold Clear .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 91 Menu functions Currency conve rsion After setting the exchange rate in the C alculator you can convert currencies with your phone either in Cal culator or in standby mode. In standby mode, en ter digits and select Options and then either In domes tic or In foreign depending on which value you r equire. Note: In standby m ode you find the decimal point under , if needed. Y ou can also use the asterisk (*) which functions like a decimal point. When you key in a n umber in the standby mode you can create a call with the number or by pressing Options you get the followin g selection list: Save Add to name 1 Send message Call In dome stic In foreign Settin g the exc hange rate in Calcula tor 1. Select Cal culat or . 2. Press Options a nd choose Exchange rate . 3. Select either Foreign unit exp r essed in domestic units or Domestic units expressed in foreign units . 1. This item shows only if the phone â s intern al memory is being used.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 92 4. Set the requir ed exchange rate. The currency exchange rate is stored permanently in ph one â s memory . â Calendar (Me nu 8) The calendar helps you to keep track of reminders, calls that you need to make, meetings, and birthdays. T he phone sounds an alarm tone w hen the set date for a meeting, birthday or a call is reached. Note: Y our phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not swi tch on the phone when the use of a wireless phone is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . Cale ndar vi ews Day view The day view shows the date and the icon(s) for each note type you have set for the day . Se e â Adding a calendar note â on page 93. To access the day view , press Menu , scroll to Calendar and pr ess Select . Note view The note vie w allows you to view th e details of the selected note. To access the note view: When in the day view , pres s Options , scroll to View day notes and press Select . Week list The week li st allows you to scroll th e calendar week by w eeks.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 93 Menu functions To access the week list : 1. When in a day view , press Options . 2. Scroll to View by weeks and press Select . Options list of calendar views The option list of calendar views includes options for making a note and for sending a note via the text message service or via IR. The option list for day view and note view also includes options f or erasing, editing, repeating and moving a note. For notes of type Meetin g , Call and Memo , there is also an option for copyin g the note to another day and for repeating th e note (every day , every week, biw eekly or every year ). The Settings option allows you to set the date, time, date format, time format and week format for the calendar . The option Auto erase allows you to set the phone to delete old notes a utomatically after a specified time. However , the repeat notes (for example, birthday notes) will not be deleted. Adding a calend ar note 1. Once in t he Calendar menu, scroll with or to th e desired date. 2. Press Options , scr oll to Make a note and press Select . 3. Scroll to one of the f ollowing note types and press Sel ect . For enterin g letters and numb ers, see â Storing names and numbersâ on page 4 1. ⢠Me eting () Enter the note an d press OK . Th en enter the time and pr ess OK . ⢠Call ()
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 94 Enter the desired phone n umber (or search for it from the ph one book) and press OK . Then e nter the desired name (or s earch for it from the phone book) a nd press OK . Repeat this with the tim e. ⢠Birt hday () Enter the person â s na me and press OK , then repeat the same with the date of birth a nd year of birth (optional). If you en ter the year of birth, th e note shows th e person â s age after the name . ⢠Memo () Enter the note a nd press OK . 4. Scroll with or to the desired alarm option (except fot the Memo ) and press Select . The pre sence of a tone alert is indicated by w hen you view th e notes. Tip: When you are in the day view or week list, you can quickly go to today â s view by pressing . When the phone alarms for a note The phone flashes its lights, beeps, and displays the note. With a Call note on the display , you can call the displayed number by pressing . To stop the alarm and view the note, press View , to stop the alarm without viewing the note, press Exit . â Task journal (Menu 9) The Task journ al is like a timecard used for keeping track of working times and costs, and also for storing various comments. The Task journal uses time and date formats of Cal endar (see page 92) and Real-time clock (see page 10 3). Note: You ca n send T ask journal data to another phone as a text message or transfer data to a compatible PC via a cable or using infrared function.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 95 Menu functions Note: Y our phone must be switched on to u se this function. Do not switch on the ph one when the use of a wireless phone is prohibited or when it m ay cause interference or danger . After selecting Task journal (Menu 9) you have the following option s: ⢠Restart , Add new , Find , Edit , Eras e and Hi stor y If the Task list is empty , the only option to view and to select is Add new . Note: If th e phone is switched off during an active task, the task is not stopped; task journal timer continues to run in the background. Also, if the phone is powered off due to a low battery , the task journal timer continues to r un as long as there is enough power to keep the phone â s main clock running. Restart ( Menu 9-1) With this submenu you can restart the existing task. If the Ta sk list is empty this option is not available. ⢠Select Re start , scroll to the desired task a nd press Start . The task is started and a new entry is cr eated. The Active work view is displayed. Add new (Menu 9-2) This submenu allows you to add a task to the T ask journal. 1. Key in the name or other identification dat a after Title : and Custome r: Maximum length of an entry is 20 characters. 2. Confirm the given entries with OK . The first ent ry of the new task is started and the phone moves t o the active work view .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 96 Note: If there is no free sp ace in the memory , Memory full. Erase old task? is displayed. Find (Menu 9-3) With this submenu you can search for previous ta sks by title, by customer . If you select By title , you need to enter the na me or a part of it for the search operation. O r you can press OK to get the list of tasks. The first matching item is h ighlighted. If there are no matches, the list starts with the closest match. ⢠If the search is done By tit le the remaining tasks appear in alph abetical order below the f irst one. ⢠If the search is done By cu stome r only the tas ks of a particular name a re shown. Edit (Menu 9-4) With this submenu you can edit both the title an d customer name of a particular task. After you have chosen this submenu the phone dis plays the Task list, and you can select the item you wish to edit. Erase (Menu 9-5 ) Ther e are tw o diffe rent way s to era se a task : ⢠One by one deletes one item at the time from the T ask list. ⢠All tasks dele tes all the existing tasks at once. Both deletions must be verified with OK .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 97 Menu functions History (Men u 9-6) Within this function you can view th e history of tasks. 1. Select History from the Task journal main menu. 2. Select from the T ask list the task you wish to examine. After a particular task is selected, the phone turns to a History view . The History view contains the following data: ⢠Title of a particular job or task ⢠Customer name ⢠Created ⢠Entries ⢠Total time ⢠Tot a l w a ge s ⢠Tot a l m at e ri al s ⢠Tot a l c os t s ⢠Comments If you need more detailed inform ation or if you want to send data to another phone, or erase something, press Options in this view .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 98 Detai ls This view shows each entry of a particular item in chronological order . The date of entry , the number of the current entry and the tota l number of entries are shown at the top of the display . Other information includes: ⢠Tas k ti me ⢠Wages ⢠Materials ⢠Costs Y ou see the next entry for the current item if scrolling with or . More detailed information on tas ks can b e found, if you pre ss Op ti ons . Time table Y ou see the working times in detail by selecting Timetab le . Started Pa us ed and / or Started Stop ped View w ages Y ou see the wages in detail by s electing View wages . The phone displays the following information: Hour s Rate
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 99 Menu functions Tot al View m ateri als Y ou see the costs of used m aterials in detail by selecting View materials . The followin g view with the entered information appears: Amount Cost Tot al Each of these views contains information about one entry only . View comments Y ou can read any comments written for the curren t entry . If you select Options you can edit given comments, send them to another phone as a text message . Send a s SMS With this option you can send h istory data from the Task journal to another phone as a text message. The content of data depends on where in the Task journal the sending option was selected. Tr ansfer ring T a sk j ournal dat a to a PC using a c able If you use a cable for transferring T ask journal data: ⢠Connect the DLR-3P cable to the serial port on the back of a compatible PC. ⢠Connect the DL R-3P cable to your phon e. Start using the T ask journal PC-connectivity pr ogram available through the Nokia website (www .nokia.com).
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 100 Note: Making or answering phone calls du ring a PC connection is not recommended as it might disrupt the operation. Tra nsferring Task journa l data to a co mpatibl e PC via in frared You can also transfer Ta sk journal data from your phone to a compatible PC via in frared function with the help of the T ask journal PC-connectivity program which is available through the Nokia website (www .n okia.com). However , it is not possible t o receive Task journal data through the infrared. See â Infr ared (Me nu 12) â on page 109 for more information. Active work vie w Active work view is shown wh en a task is active in the Task journal. Likewise, th e timing starts in this view . The active work view contains t he following information: ⢠title of your task ⢠starting time of th e current entry ⢠duration of the current entry ⢠total work time If you select Opti on s you can pause or stop the task, add cost or comment, find another t ask or view the history of a task. Pa u s e t a s k When the task is stopped by using Pa u s e you can resume it later . The text Pa u s e d blinks on th e display and the timer stops, bu t it is not cleared. To carry on with the same task, Select Options and th en Continue .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 101 Menu functions After pausing the task you can also s top the task, add cost information or a comment to it or view its histo ry . Stop task 1. Press Stop if you w ish to end the task. 2. Conf irm with OK . This stops the timer and ends the current entry . The task is saved. The summary of this entry is displayed: ⢠Dur atio n ⢠Wag es ⢠Materia ls ⢠Comments If you select Options you can still add cost or a comment, restart the task or send the data to another phone. If any information is added to the entry , the phone returns to th e updated summary view afte rwa rds. Add cost Y ou can als o enter cost information in the active work view . The maximum entry is 9 digits with two decimals. 1. Select Wag es and the text Hou rly w age: appears. 2. Key in the wage. 3. Confirm the value with OK . The entered data can be viewed on th e display:
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 102 ⢠Hours for showing the duration of the cu rrent entry up to that specific moment ⢠Rate for showing the hourly wage ⢠Tot a l for showing the current summary of wages By selecting Material you ca n add material costs to total costs. 1. Enter a name or other identification of the par t in question after Ma terial id: and press OK . 2. Give the amount of used parts. 3. Key in the price of one piece after Price: and press OK . The following in formation is displayed: ⢠Amount ⢠Cost ⢠Tot a l for showing the summary of costs in the current addition Add comment Y ou can store comments or make n otes by selecting Add comment . The length of the comment is limited to 40 char acters. Press Clear if you want to delete the written text. Press Save i f y o u w an t t o ke ep th e te x t .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 103 Menu functions â Clock (Menu 1 0) Stopwa tch (Menu 1 0-1) Note: Y our phone must be switched on to use this f unction. Do not switch on the phone when the us e of a wir eless phone is prohibited or w hen it may cause interference or danger . Y ou can m easure time with your phone using the stopwatch. With the stopwatch it is possible to measure time, take intermediate times or lap times. If you press during the stopwatch timing, you r phone returns to the standby mode and the timing moves to the bac kground. Y ou can use the phone as usual. The timing is also moved fr om the display to the b ackground if there is: ⢠incoming call ⢠battery low note ⢠recharge battery note ⢠other types of special m essages Note: Using the stopwatch consumes the battery and the phone âÂÂs operating time will be reduced. Therefore, to maximize the operating time of your phone, it is recommended not to let it run in the background (i.e. whe n performing other oper ations with your phone) when you don â t need it.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 104 Spli t timing Y ou can start meas uring time by selecting Menu - Clo ck- Stopwatch - Split timing . The phone displays an initial state, and the initial value is shown in big digital n umbers 00:00: 00:0. 1. Pre ss Start and the clock starts running. 2. Pre ss Stop when you wa nt to finis h. When timing is stopped, th e result is shown on the display . Note: If timing excee ds the value of 99:59:59:9, the tim e on the display changes to 00:00:00:0 and the clock keeps running. By pre ssing Options you can restart, save, reset and e xit the timing function. If you start th e timing anew by pressing Start , time keeps running cumulatively instead of restarting at z ero. If you select Exit , the phone returns to the stan dby mode. If the stopwatch was not reset, there is a n active item Show last on the selection list. Interm ediate times 1. Pre ss Start . 2. Pre ss Split when you want to see an intermedi ate time. Time keeps running as usu al but also the newest intermediate time is displayed under the running time. Intermediate times are shown in smaller font than the run ning time. Three intermediate times can be view ed si mult aneo usly w ith the runni ng ti me. If th ere a re mor e of th em, y ou ca n v iew t hem b y scrolling with or . Timing stops when you press Stop .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 105 Menu functions Lap timing This function is s tarted by selecting Lap timing from th e Stopwatch main menu. 1. Press Start and he c lock s tart s ru nning. 2. Press Lap when you want to see the lap time. By pressing Lap , timing stops and then restarts immediately at zero. T he newest lap time is displayed under the running time. Three lap times can be viewed simultaneously with r unning time on the phone â s display . Scroll with or to view any furth er lap tim es. When you press Stop timing stops and the total time is shown as a resu lt. Note: If you s elect Split timing or Lap timing from the Options list while there is timing going on in the background, the confirmation note Disconti nue previou s? appears. Saving o r resetti ng time s 1. Press Options a nd then select Save from th e list. 2. Key in the name for the tim e value after Name: The max imum numbe r of charact ers is 1 0. 3. Confirm the given name with OK . To reset the tim es: After selecting Reset f rom the list of options, confirm the resetting with OK . The phone returns to th e initial state where the initial value 00:00 :00:0 is shown. Viewing times Y ou can see s aved times by selecting View times . The nam ed time sets are listed on the d isplay .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 106 If you select a particular time set, you can view its times. Intermediate and lap times ar e displayed in a smaller font underneath the final tim e. Scroll with or to view any further times. In this view , you can erase times by selecting Options and then Erase t ime s . Dele ting times Y ou can delete times from the stopwatch memory by selecting Erase tim es from the Stopwatch main menu. It is also possible to erase times by selecting this function u nder Options . Y ou can erase times one by one or all times at once. In either way the phone still prompts you to confirm the deletion with OK . Note: If you try to erase a time when there are no more tim e sets, the phone displays the note Stopwatch memory empty . Stopwatch memory The memory reserved for stopwatch tim es is limited. The maximum number of st opwatch times is 250. The stopwatch memory stor es its content also when the phone â s power is switched off. Alarm clo ck (Menu 10-2) Y ou can set the phone to alarm at a specified time within the Alarm cl ock m e n u ( M e n u 1 0 - 2 ). T o access this submen u, press Men u , then select firs t Clock , then Alarm c lock and press Select . The alarm clock uses the time format set for the clock: i .e.12-hour or 24 -hour format. In the stan dby mode, the indicator in the header line shows th at the alarm is set to On . Y ou can switch the phone off and the alarm clock w ill still work.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 107 Menu functions When the alarm expires : The phone wi ll sound an alert tone. W hen the phone is alerting, Alarm! is also shown and the phone â s lights flash. Press Sto p to stop the alarm. If you let the phone alarm for a m inute or press Snooze , the alarm stops for a few minutes an d then resumes. Note: If the alarm tim e expires while the phone is switched off, the phone starts alarming. If you press Stop , the phone asks if you want to activat e the phone for calls. Press Ye s to register or No to keep the phone switched off. Note: Do not switch on the phone when the u se of a wireless phone is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . Time s etting s (Menu 1 0-3) The phone is provided with a clock. The current time is shown on the display if you have selected Show clock option. The clock wi ll not show if you are in the phone book or in menu functions. Note: Y our phone must be switched on to u se this function. Do not switch on the ph one when the use of a wireless phone is prohibited or when it m ay cause interference or danger . Show clock / Hide cloc k (Menu 1 0-3-1) With this menu you can either show or hide the clock. Set th e time (Men u 1 0-3-2) 1. Once in Menu 1 0- 3-2, pre ss Select . 2. Enter the pr esent time and press OK .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 108 Time format (Menu 1 0-3-3) This submenu allows you to select the 12-hour or 24-hour time f ormat. Scroll to either format and press OK . The clock also serves the following functions: Messages (Me nu 1), Call r egister (Menu 2), Alarm clock (Menu 1 0-2), Calendar (Men u 8) a nd Task journal (Men u 9). Note: If the battery is removed from the phone for a long time, you may need to set the time again. â Sound meter (Menu 1 1) The Sound meter is not in tended for professional use. It is rather a f un feature providing you with the mean s to measure the estimated noise le vel of your surroundings. Note: Y our phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not swi tch on the phone when the use of a wireless phone is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . The phone displays a vertical m eter bar that shows the n oise level graphically . There is also a numerical presentation of the sound level. The peak value is shown in a frame on the top and the current value is presented underneath. The unit of these numerical va lues is the decibel (dB). Note: It is not possible to me asure the estimated noise level of a call in progress. Please note that the Sound meter in your phone is NOT a professional precision instrument. It can only display an approximation of the real dB level. The Sound meter of your phone measures the sound leve l in frequencies between 300Hz and 3400Hz, meaning approximately the f requencies that are most important f or the speech intelligibility and are
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 109 Menu functions conveyed through the GSM system in a normal call. Noise beneath and above those frequencies will not be meas ured. When you p ress Options you get a list of three: ⢠Reset ⢠Hold ⢠Dynamic With Reset you can reset the peak valu e. With Hold both values are shown but the peak value is updated only when the current n oise level is greater than th e current peak va lue. With Dynamic both values are shown bu t the peak value is valid only for 5 seconds. Note: Using the sound meter consumes the battery and the phone â s operating time will be reduced considerably . It is recommended n ot to use the sound meter when n ot needed. â Infrared (Menu 12) In this menu you ca n set up your phone to r eceive data through its infrared (IR) port. To u se an IR connection, the device with which you want to establish a connection must be IrDA compliant. You can send or receive data such as business cards (names and numbers stored in the phone book) an d calendar notes to or from a compatible phone or data device (for example, a computer) via the IR port of your phone. Y ou can sen d Task journal da ta via the IR port to a com patible PC with the help of the Task journal PC- connectivity program which is available through the Nokia website (www .nokia.com). It is not possible
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 110 to send Tas k journal data to anoth er phone via infrared, though. Y ou can not receive T ask journal data from a PC. Note: Y our phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not swi tch on the phone when the use of a wireless phone is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . To se nd and r eceive data v ia IR 1. Ensure that the IR ports of the sending and receiving devices are poi nting at each other and that there are no obstructions between the devices. The preferable distance between the two devices in an infrared connection is one meter at most. 2. When receiving data via IR, activate the IR port of your phone by entering the Inf rared menu (Menu 12). 3. The user of the sending phone selects the desired IR function to start data transfer . If data transfer is not star ted within two minutes of a ctivation of the IR port, the connection is cancelled and has to be started again. Note: Your phone is a Class 1 Laser Product. Chec king the stat us of an IR con nection The status of an IR connection is indicated by . When is shown continuously , the IR connection is activated and you r phone is ready to s end and receive data via its IR port. When is not shown, no IR connection exists. When blinks, your phone is trying to connect to th e other device or a con nection has been lost.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 111 Menu functions â Mobile Internet Services (WAP) Var ious WAP (Wireless Application Pr otocol) service providers on the Internet maintain web pages specifically designed for mobile phones, offering services such as ba nking, news, weather reports, flight times, etc. Note: Check the availability of W ML- based services, pricing and tarifs w ith your network operator and/or the W AP service provider . Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. These web pages use a M ark-Up language called WML (Wireless Mark-Up Language). W eb pages using the Mark-Up language HTML (Hyper Text Mark-Up language) cannot be view ed on your phone. Note: Y our phone must be switched on to use this f unction. Do not switch on the phone when the us e of a wir eless phone is prohibited or w hen it may cause interference or danger . Y ou can access WA P services via the Services menu (Menu 13 ) after y ou have stored t he sett ings required to access a service. Setti ng up the phone for the W AP services Before you can access WAP services you need to store the required con nection settings of a WAP service, from which you can visit the WAP pages they offer . Y ou get the connection settin gs from WAP service providers. They m ay send you the settings as a text message or you should key in th e settings manually . Y ou can stor e the connection settings under one of the five sets in your phone. Each connection set contains the required settings for one WAP service and you need to store the settin gs for each W AP service only once.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 112 Saving the settings received a s a text message When you receive the connection settings as a text message, you will see the message Service settings rece iv ed on your display . ⢠To store the received settings, press Options , and scroll to Save . ⢠If you want to view th e settings first, press Options , and scroll to View . Th e name a nd the homepage address of the received setting are displayed. Press Save to st ore the settings or Back to return to the option li st. Keying in the settings manually Note: You get the settings from W AP service providers. They will give you more specific in formation. 1. Pre ss Menu ; scroll to Services and press Select . 2. Scroll to Sett ings and press Select . 3. Pre ss Select when Connection settings is displayed. 4. Scroll to a connection set and press Options . 5. Scroll to Edit and press Select . The settings are: ⢠Hom epage - write the homepage address of the connection set ⢠Connection type - select Continuous or T emp orary ⢠Connection security - select On or Off . Note: When the connection security is on, the phone tries to u se a secure line when a service is activated. If a secure line is not available, the connection will not be made. If you wish to connect anyway , with a n on-secure connection, you must set the connection security to Off .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 113 Menu functions ⢠Bearer - select SMS or Data . The speed and cost differs according to the bearer you select. For pricing and more in formation, contact the WA P service provider . Ke y in the settings listed below as instructed by the service provider . SMS se lected a s the be arer Server number Service number Data se lected a s the bearer Dial-up number IP addres s Authentica tion type - sel ect Secure or Normal Data ca ll type - select Analogue or ISDN . You can select a fixed data call type which also effects the data call speed. When ISDN is selected, the data call speed in cludes only the options 9600 and 14 400 bps. Data call speed - Automa tic selects the data call speed automatically but th is is not possible if ISDN has been selected as the data call type. The speed of the data call depends on the service provider . User name Pa s s w o r d Editin g th e settin gs There is space for five connection sets in your phone. T o add a new set you have to ov erwrite an existing stored set if the five sets are already being ut ilized. By selecting the optio n Rename , you can rename the connection set.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 114 Y ou can choose whether images ar e shown or not and how the text is shown on the display when you are browsing a W A P page. In some ca ses WML pages may have text wrapping set to off (that is , lines are cut when there is no more space on the line ) as a default; select On to see the whole text. 1. Pre ss Menu , scroll to the Services and press Select . 2. Scroll to Sett ings and press Select . 3. Scroll to A ppearance set ting s and press Select . 4. Scroll to Text wrapping or Show images and press Sele ct . 5. Select On or Off fo r Text wrapping and Ye s or No for Show images . Accessing W AP pages Once you have stored all the required con nection settings you can access W AP pages. There are three different ways of accessing W AP pages: ⢠Opening a homepage (by sele cting Hom e in the options of the Services menu) ⢠Selecting a bookmark (by selecting Bookmarks in the option s of the Services menu) ⢠Entering the address of a WAP page ( by selecting Go to address in the options of the Services menu ) First, you need to activate the connection set of the WAP service you want to use. Only on e set can be activated at a tim e. Activat ing a connectio n set 1. Pre ss Menu , scroll to Services and press Select . 2. Scroll to Sett ings and press Select .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 115 Menu functions 3. Press Select when Co nnection settings is displayed. 4. Scroll to the desired connection set and press Options . Then scroll to Activa te and press Select . Accessin g a WA P page by openin g the homepage 1. When you are in the standby mode, press Menu , scroll to Services and press Select . 2. T o connect to the homepage of the serv ice, press Select when Home is highlighted. Boo kmar ks Y ou can save the addresses of up to 1 5 of your favourite or m ost frequently used WAP pages in the phone â s memor y . Adding book marks 1. Press Menu , scroll to Services and press Select . 2. Scroll to Bookma rks and press Select 3. Press Options , then press Select when Add bookmar k is highlighted. 4. Enter the address of the desired service and press OK . Then enter a title for the s ervice and press OK Tip: Y ou can also add a bookmark while browsing. First press Option s and s croll to Bookmarks and press Select . Then pr ess Options and select Save book mark and press Sel ect . Acce ssing a WAP page by us ing the bookma rks 1. Press Menu , scroll to Services and press Select . 2. Scroll to Bookma rks and press Select . 3. Scroll to the desired b ookmark and press Options . To connect to t he service, scroll to Go t o and press Select .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 116 Note: A bookmark may become associated with the connection setting that you used when it was first added. If the bookmark does not work (the text Check service settings may be displayed), you may need to activate another connection set. Accessing a WAP pag e by entering its a ddress 1. Pre ss Menu , scroll to Services and press Select . 2. Scroll to Go to address and press Select . 3. Key in the address (u se the key to enter special characters) of the W AP page you want to visit and press OK . Note : It is not necessary to enter the prefix http://; it will be added autom atically . If you are using a protocol other than http (s uch as ftp), you will have to enter the prefix. Viewing W AP pages When you are con nected to the homepage of a WAP service, follow the tex t guides on the ph one â s display . Keys used in WAP naviga tion ⢠Press , e.g. to select a link. ⢠Use the scroll keys and to view a W AP page. ⢠Press to disconnect from a W AP page and to quit br owsing. ⢠Press the keys - to enter letters and numbers and the key to enter special characters. ⢠Press the right selection key e.g. to go back to the previously accessed WAP pa ge. ⢠Press the left selection key e.g. to display the list of options.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 117 Menu functions While you are browsing a s ervice, pressing Options displays the currently a vailable option list. Scroll to the desir ed option and press Sele ct . Here are some of the possible options which may become available while browsing: Home (to go to the homepage), Relo ad (to reload the page), Sele ct (to select a link), Back (to go back to the previously accessed WAP page), Appear ance se ttings (to set the settings for the text and images), Bookmarks (to add a bookmark), Use number (to extract numbers from the se rvice you are using or from the page that is displayed), Go t o ad dress (to enter the address of the WAP page you wish to access), Clear the cache (to clear the cache memory of the phone), Security info (to see whether the con nection is secured or not) and Exit (to quit browsing). Emptyi ng the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the phone. A cache is a buffer memory that is used to store data temporarily . Note : If you have tried to access or have acc essed confidential information requiring passwords (for example, your ban k account), empty the cache of your phone prior to each use to secure the con fidentiality 1. Press Menu , scroll to Services and press Select . 2. To empty the cache memory of your phone, scroll to Clear the c ache and press Select .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 118 Security certificate s For using some services, you need a security certificate. A security certificate is used to enable secure communications with a WAP gateway or a server . The certificates are used to check signatures of WAP gateway or server certificates an d can be downloaded during browsing. Y ou can only be sure of the correct identity of a WAP gateway or a server wh en the signature and the period of validity of a W AP gateway or a server certificate have been checked.Y ou will be notified on the phone â s display if the identity of the WAP server or gateway cannot be verified, the WAP server or gateway is not authentic or if you do not ha ve the right security certificate in your phone. After you have downloaded the required security certificate from the Internet, you can v iew the certificate and then save or delete it. If you sa ve it, the certificate is added to th e list of security certificates in the Services menu. To view t he list of security certific ates: 1. Pre ss Menu , scroll to the Services menu and press Select . 2. Scroll to Sett ings and press Select . 3. Scroll to Security certifica te and Select . Note: When the secu rity icon is displayed, the data tr ansmission between the phone and the WAP gateway or a server (identified by the IP ad dress in the Connection settings ) is encrypted and secure. However , the security icon does not indica te that the data transm ission between the gateway and the content server (place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. I t is up to the ser vice provider to secure the data tr ansmission between the gateway and the content server .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 119 Menu functions â SIM services (Menu 14) In addition to the functions a vailable in the phone, your SIM card may provide additional s ervices that you can a ccess via the menu 14. Menu 14 is shown only if it is supported by your SIM card. T he name and contents of the m enu depend entirely on the services available. For availability , rates and in formation on using the SIM s ervices, contact your SIM car d vendor , e.g. your network operator , service provider or oth er third-party vendor . Y ou can set the phone to show you the confirmation m essages sent between your phone and th e network when you are using th e SIM services by selecting the option Asked with in the me nu 4-2- 6 ( Confirm SIM service actions ). Note: Accessing these services may in volve sending a text message (SMS) or making a phone call for which you may be charged.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Data and fax communications 120 7. Data and fax communicatio ns Y our phone allows you to transfer data to other devices when it is connected to a compatible PC via an IR connection or a serial ca ble. To send and r eceive e-mail a nd faxes, conne ct to computers and access the Internet, you also n eed the appropriate data and fax communications software installed on your computer . You can use the Nokia 6250 with a variety of com mercially available data and fax communications applications. For using your ph one as a modem, you f irst need to install it as a modem. The path to the detailed installation instructions and t he required system files can be found th rough the Nokia website (www .n okia.com). â Connecting your phone to a computer Installing communication s applicatio ns and modem dr ivers 1. Ensure that a data communication application is correctly installed on your PC. For information on how to install an application, please refer to that application â s documentation. 2. Install the necessary driver s on your PC. For instructions, see the Nokia website (www .nokia.com) to find the modem setup application. For troubleshooting, please r efer to the Readme.txt file which can be found on the N okia website. Using communi cations appl ications Do either of the following:
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Data and fax communications 121 Data and fax communications If yo u use IR: ⢠Activate the IR connection of you r phone by selecting Men u 12. ⢠Make sure that the infrared port of th e phone faces the infrared port of th e PC. If you us e a cable: ⢠Connect the DLR-3 P cable to the serial port on the back of your PC. ⢠Connect the DL R-3P cable to your phon e. Note: Both the cable a nd the connector must be dry . Start using the dat a communication application on the PC. For information on how to use the application, please refer to that a pplication â s docu mentation. Note: Making or answering phone calls during a PC connection is not r ecommended as it might disrupt the operation. For better performance during data calls, place the phone on a stationary surface with the keypad facing downward. Do not move the phone by holding it in your hand during a data call.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Reference information 122 8. Reference information â Access codes Y ou can use the access codes described in th is section to avoid unauthorised u se of your phone and SIM card. The access codes (except PU K, PUK2 and keylock codes) can be changed by using Menu 4-5-6. See the following section. Security code (5 digits ) The security code can be used to avoid unauthorised use of your phone. The factory setting f or the security code is 12345. T o avoid unauthorised use of your phone, change the code in th e Settings menu, see â Security level (Menu 4-5-5) on page 86 and â Chan ge of access codes (Menu 4-5-6) â on page 87. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separ ate from your phone. PIN code (4 to 8 digits) The PIN (Personal Identification Number) code protects your S IM card against unauthorised use. The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM c ard. When the PIN code request is enabled (Menu 4 -5-1), the code is requested each time th e phone is switched on. PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits) The PIN2 code, supplied with some SIM ca rds, is required to access s ome functions, such as charging unit counters. These functions are only available if supported by your SIM card.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Reference information 123 Reference information PUK code ( 8 digits) The PUK (P ersonal Unblocking Key) code is required to change a blocked PIN code. The PUK code may be supplied with the SIM card. If not, contact your local service provider for the code. If you lose the code, contact your service pr ovider . PUK2 code (8 digit) The PUK2 code, supplied with some SI M cards, is required to change a blo cked PIN2 code. If you lose the code, contact your s ervice provider . Key lock code (4 di git) Y ou can use keylock code (M enu 4-3-2) to pr event the u nauthorised u se of your phon e. The de fault code i s 00 00. Note: Before activating the keylock code make sure that the PIN code request is also set on. Barring pa ssword The barring password is needed when usin g the â Call Bar ring â function. Y ou obtain the password from your service provider . â Battery information Chargin g and discha rging the battery ⢠Never charge the phone when the bottom connector or phone itself is wet or damp. ⢠Do not charge the ph one in wet and damp conditions.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Reference information 124 ⢠Your phone is powered by a rechargeable battery . ⢠Note that a new battery's fu ll performance is achieved only after two or three com plete charge and discharge cycles. ⢠The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the operating time (talk-time and stand-by time) is noticeably shorter than normal, it is time to buy a new battery . ⢠Use only batteries approved by the ph one manufacturer and rech arge your battery only with the chargers approved by the manufacturer . ⢠When a charger is not in use, disconnect it from the power source. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger f or longer than a w eek, since overcharging may shorten its life. If left unused a fully c harged battery will discharge itself over t ime. ⢠Temperature extremes will af fect the ability of your battery to charge: allow it to cool down or warm u p first . ⢠When the battery is running out of power and only few minutes of talk time remain, a warning tone is heard and Battery low is briefly displayed. W hen no more talk time is left, Battery empty is displayed and a warning tone is sounded and the phone switches itself off. Usin g the batt erie s ⢠The battery must be kept dry . ⢠Use the battery only for its intended purpose. ⢠Never use any charger or battery which is dam aged or worn out. ⢠Do not short-circuit the battery . Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, clip or pen) causes direct connection of the and - ter minals of the battery (metal strips on the
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Reference information 125 Reference information back of the battery) for example when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- circuiting the terminals m ay damage the battery or the connecting object. ⢠Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery . Always try to keep th e battery between 15 ú C a nd 25 ú C (59 F and 77 F). A ph one with a hot or cold battery may temporarily not work, even when the battery is fully charged. Li-Ion batteries performance is particularly limited in temperatures below - 0 ú C (32 F). ⢠Do not dispose of batter ies in a fire! Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly . Must not be disposed of in municipal waste!
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Care and maintenance 126 Care and m aintenance Y our phone is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care . The suggestions below will h elp you to fulfill any warranty obligations and to enjoy this product for many years. Whe n using your phone, battery , charger OR any accessory: ⢠Keep it and a ll its parts and a ccessories out of small children's reach. ⢠Try to keep it dry . Prec ipitation, humidity and liquids contain minera ls that will eventually corrode the connectors . ⢠Do not store your phone in dusty , dirty areas as this may cause damage to some parts of the phone. ⢠Do not store it in hot areas. High temperatu res can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store it in cold areas. Whe n the phone warms up (to its normal temperature) , moisture can form inside the phone, which may damage the electronic circuit board. ⢠Do not open the w ater re sistant backc over if th e phone i s wet or d irty . ⢠Do not attempt to open it except as instructed. Non -expert handling of the device may damage it. ⢠Do not intentionally drop, knock or shake it. Rough handling is never recommended or beneficial for your phone â s fu nctionality . ⢠Do not use harsh che micals, clea ning solvents, or strong detergents to clean it. Wipe it w ith a soft cloth slight ly dampened in a mild so ap-and-water solution . ⢠Do not paint it. P aint can clog the device â s moving parts an d prevent proper ope ration. ⢠If the phone, battery , charger or any accessory are not working properly , take them to your nearest qualifie d service facility. The person nel there will assist you, and if necessary , arrange for service.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Important safety information 127 Important safety information Important safety information â Traffic s afety Do not use a hand-held telepho ne while driving a vehicle. If using a hand-held phone park the vehicle before conversing. Always secure the phone in its holde r; do not place the phone on the passenger seat or where it can break loose in a collision or sudden stop. The use of an alert device to operate a vehicle â s lights or horn on public roads is not permitted. Remember road safety always comes first! â Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulatio ns in force in any area a nd always switch off yo ur phone wh enever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may caus e interference or danger. When connecting the phone or any accessory to another device, read its user guide for detailed safety instruction s. Do not connect in compatible products . As with other mobile radio transmitting equipme nt, users are advised that for the satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of pe rsonnel, it is reco mmended that t he equipment sh ould only be use d in the normal operating position (Held to your ear .). Do not point the infrared beam at anyone â s eye or allow it to int erfere with other infrared devices. â Electronic devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio frequency (RF) signals. However , c ertain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless phone.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Important safety information 128 Pa c e m a ke r s Pacemaker manufacture rs recommend th at a minimum separa tion of 20 cm (6 inches) be ma intained betw een a hand-held wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential int erference with the pacemaker . These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless T echnology Research. Pers ons with pacemak er: ⢠Should always keep the ph one more than 20 cm (6 inches) from th eir pacemaker when the phone is switched on; ⢠Should not carry the phone in a breast pocket; ⢠Should use the ear opposite the pacem aker to minimize the potential for interferen ce. ⢠If you have any reason to s uspect tha t interferen ce is taking place, swit ch off your phone immediate ly . Hearing ai ds Some digital wireless phones may interfe re with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult y our service prov ider . Other medical devices Operation of a ny radio transmitting eq uipment, including cellu lar phones, may interfe re with the functiona lity of inadequately protecte d medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the me dical device to determ ine if th ey are ad equately shielde d from ext ernal RF energy or if y ou have any ques tions. Switch off you r phone in health care facilitie s when any regulation s posted in these areas inst ruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment th at could be sensitive to external RF energy . Ve h i c l e s RF signals may affect improperly installed or inade quately shielded e lectronic systems in m otor vehicles (e.g. electronic fue l injection systems, electroni c anti-skid (anti-lock) braking sys tems, electronic speed control sy stems, air bag systems).
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Important safety information 129 Important safety information Check with the manufact urer or its representativ e regarding your vehicle. You should also cons ult the m anufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle. Po s te d f a c i l i ti e s Switch your phone off in any facility where posted notices so require. â P otentially explosive atmospheres Switch off your phone when in any area with a potentially explosive atmo sphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in suc h areas could cause an explosion or fire resu lting in bodily injury or even death. Users are advi sed to switch off the phone wh en at a refuelling point (servic e station). Users are rem inded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats; chemic al transfer or storage facilities ; vehicles using liquifie d petroleum gas (such as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain , dust or metal powders; and any othe r area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehic le engine. â Ve hi cl es Only qualified personn el should service the phone, or install the pho ne in a vehicle. Faulty installa tion or service may be dan gerous and may invalida te any w arranty whic h may apply to the unit. Check regularly that all wireless phone equipment in you r vehicle is mounted and operating prope rly . Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the phone, its parts or accessories. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including both installed or portable wireless equ ipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireles s equipment is impro perly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Important safety information 130 Switch off your phone before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wi reless telephone netw ork and may be illegal. Failure to observe these instructions may lead to suspension or denial of telephone services to the offender , or legal action or both. â Emerg enc y c alls IMPOR TANT! This phone, like any wireless phone, operates using radio signals, wireless and landline networks as we ll as user-programmed functions w hich cannot gu arantee connection in all co nditions. Therefore, you should ne ver rely solely upon a ny wireless phone for esse ntial commun ications (e.g. medi cal emer genc ies). Remembe r , to make or rec eive any calls the phone must be s witched on and in a service area w ith adequ ate cellular signal strength. Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless phone networks or when certain network services an d/or phone features are in use. C heck with local cellu lar service providers. To make an emergency call: 1. If the phone is not on, switch it on. Some networks may require th at a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the phone. 2 . P r e s s a s m an y t i m e s a s ne ed e d ( e .g . t o e x i t a c a ll , t o e x it a m e n u , et c .) to cl ea r t h e d i s p l a y. 3. K ey in the emergenc y num ber for your pr esent locatio n (e.g. 1 12 or othe r off icial emergenc y numbe r). Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Pr ess the key . If certain featu res are in use (Keypad lock, Fixed Dialling, etc.), you ma y first need to turn those featu res off before you ca n make an eme rgency c all. Consult this doc ument an d your loc al cellula r service provider . When mak ing an emergency ca ll, remember to give all the necessary inform ation as accurately as poss ible. Remember that your wireless phone may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident - do not cut off the call until given pe rmission to do so.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Techni cal specific ations 131 Techni cal specific ations T echn ical spec ificatio ns Weigh t: ⢠174g Dimensions (min.- max): ⢠142 x 50-58 x 23 -27 mm, 1 59 cc Tal kt im e : ⢠3 h 15 mi n - 5 h 50 min 1 Standby time: ⢠72 h - 336 h 1 Durability: ⢠The Nokia 6250 can su rvive a drop up to 3 metres and immersion for up to 1 m inute in water up to 0.5 m deep . 2 Display: High resolution, illuminated, full-graphics dyn amic display , adjustable contrast, 96 x 60 pixels, 30.6mm x 24.1 mm, 7-bar battery and signal status indicators Dual band operation: EGSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 900 /1800 dual-band networks. Automatic switching between the bands. 1. Variation in operation times will occur depending on SIM card, netw ork settings and usage. 2. Water may not be warmer than 50 ð C.
LIMITED MANUFACTURERâÂÂS W ARRANTY PART OF EUROPE & AFRICA REGION This limi ted warran ty shall a pply in par t of Nok ia Mobile Phonesâ Europe & Afri ca Region unless a local warranty exis ts. Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd ("Nokia") warran ts that this NOKIA product ("Produ ct") is at the time of its original purchase fre e of defects in materi als, design and workmansh ip subject to the following t erms and condi tions: 1. This limited warranty is giv en to the end-purc haser of the Product ("Cu stomer"). It shall neithe r exclude nor limit i) any mandatory statu tory rights of the Customer or ii) any of the C ustome râÂÂs rights against th e seller /dealer o f the Product. 2. The warran ty period is twelve (12) mo nths from the date on which the fir st Customer purchase d the Product. In case of a subs equent purch ase or other change of owner /user , such warranty pe riod shall continu e for the remaining part of the twelv e (12) mont h period and otherwis e remain unaffected . This limited warranty is on ly valid and enforceab le in the follow ing countr ies: Bosnia, B ulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus , the Czech Republic, Est onia, any member state of the European Unio n, Hungary, Iceland, Israel, Latvia, Lithuani a, Macedonia, Malta, Norw ay , Poland, Romania, th e Slovak Republic, Sl ovenia, Switzerla nd and Turk ey. 3. During the warrant y perio d Nokia or its authori zed serv ice company will repai r or replace, at Nokia â s sole discr etion, a defective Prod uct. Nokia will r eturn the repaired Product or another Produ ct to the Customer in good wor king condition. All parts or other eq uipment for which replaceme nts have been pr ovided shall be come the proper ty of Nok ia. 4. A repaire d or replaced Product will n ot be given a prolonged o r renewed warranty period. 5. This lim ited warranty will not cove r painted covers or o ther similar pers onalized pa rts. In all cases that re quire unlocking or locking of an operator SIM-lock, Nokia will first di rect the C ustomer to such opera tor for un locking or locking of t he operator SIM-l ock before repairi ng or replacing t he Product. 6. This l imited warranty shall not appl y to deteriorat ions due to normal wear and tear . This limite d warranty shall furthe r not apply if: i. The defect was caused by the fact that the Product has been subje cted to: use in contradict ion with the o wner's/ user manu al, rough ha ndling, exposu re to moi sture, dampness or extreme therm al or environ mental conditio ns or rapid c hanges in su ch conditio ns, corrosio n, oxidati on, unauthori zed modificatio ns or connecti ons, unauthor ized opening or repair , repair by use of unauthori zed spare parts, m isuse, impr oper installat ion, accident, forces of nature, s pillage of food or liquid, i nfluence from chemical products or other acts beyond the reas onable control of Nokia (in cluding but no t limited to def iciencies in consumable pa rts, such as batte ries which all b y their nature have a limited lif etime, and brea kage or damage to antennas) unless the defect was caused directly by defects in mate rials, design o r workm anship; ii. No kia or its authoriz ed service com pany was not notifie d by the Cu stomer of th e defect wit hin thirty (30 ) days after the appearance of the defect with in the warranty period; iii. the Product wa s not retu rned to Nokia or it s authoriz ed service c ompany within th irty (30) days aft er the appearance of the defect within the warranty period; iv . the Product s erial number , the accessory da te code or the IMEI num ber has b een remov ed, erase d, deface d, altere d or is illeg ible; v . the def ect was caused by a defective function of the cellular n etwork; vi. the defect was caused by the fact that the Product was used with or conne cted to an accessory not m anufactured and suppli ed by Nokia or u sed in other than its int ended use; vii. the defect was caused by the fact that the battery was short-circui ted or seals of the battery encl osure or cells were broken or show evi dence of tampering or the batte ry was use d in equip ment othe r than fo r which it has be en specifie d; or viii. the Product software needs t o be upgraded d ue to changes in cellular netw ork parameters. 7. To claim this limite d warranty the Customer shall present either i) a le gible and non-mo dified original warranty card which cle arly indic ates the na me and address of the s eller , the date and place of purchase, t he product t ype and the IMEI or other s erial number or alter natively ii) a legi ble and non-modifie d original pur chase receipt which contain s the same info rmation, if s uch purchase re ceipt is pr esented to the sell er/dealer of the Product . 8. This limi ted warranty is the Customer's s ole and exclusive remedy against Nokia and Nokia's sole and exclusive liabilit y against the Custome r for defects or malfunct ions of the Pr oduct. Thi s limited w arranty r eplaces al l other warranties and liabilitie s, whether oral , written, (non- mandatory) s tatutory , contractual, in tort or otherwise. Nokia is in no event liable for any inc idental, conseque ntial or indire ct damage , costs or expe nses. Neithe r is Nokia in any event liable for any direct damage, costs or expenses, if the Custome r is a legal perso n. 9. Any chang e or amendment to th is limited warran ty requires Noki a's prior writ ten consent.
â WARRANTY CARD FILL IN WITH BLOCK LETTE RS Purchaser â s Name: _________ __________ ____________ __________ _________ Address: _________ __________ ____________ __________ _________ _________ __________ ____________ __________ _________ Country: _________ __________ ____________ __________ _________ Phone: _________ __________ ____________ __________ _________ Date of Purchase (dd/mm/yy): |_ _|__| /|__|__ | /|_ _|__| Product Type (on phone type label under battery): |__|__|__| â |__|__|__| Product Model (on phone type label under battery): |__|__|__| __| Phone Serial No (on phone type label under battery): |__|__ |__|__|__| __|/|__| __| /|__|__|__| __|__|__ |/|__| Place of Purchase: _________ __________ ____________ __________ _________ Store Name: _________ __________ ____________ __________ _________ Store Address: _________ __________ ____________ __________ _________ Stamp ITEM B IMEI
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, Nokia Mobile Phones Lt d declare under our sole responsib ility that the product NHM -3 is in conformity with the provisions of the following Council Dire ctive: 199 9/5/EC. Copyright é Nokia M obile Phones 2000. All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfer , distribution or storage of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior w ritten permission of Nokia is prohibited. Nokia and Nokia Connecting People are regis tered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners. Nokia tune is a trademark of Nokia Corporation. US Patent No 58 18437 and other pending pat ents. T9 text input software Copyright (C) 199 7-2000. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights rese rved. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security . Nokia operates a policy of continuous development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nokia be responsible for any loss of data or i ncome or any special, incidental, consequential or i ndirect damages howsoever caused. The contents of this document are provided "as is". Except as required by applicable law , no warranties of any kind, either exp ress or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fit ness for a particular purpose, are mad e in relation to the accuracy , reliability or contents of this document. N okia reserves the right to revise this document or withdra w it at any t ime with out pri or noti ce The availability of particular products may vary by region. Please check with the Nokia dealer nearest to you.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Quick guide Quick guide â Quick guide These pages give you some tips for using your Nokia 6250 phone. For more detailed information, read through the user guide. â Making your first call Before you can make your first call, see âÂÂGetting startedâ on page 27 to learn how to ⢠insert the SIM card, ⢠install and charge the battery , ⢠switch on your phone. 1. Key in the area code and phone number and press . 2. Press to end the call. â Call functions Answer ing a ca ll ⢠Press . ⢠Press Op ti on s if you wan t to mute the ringing ton e before answering a call. Then select Answer from th e selection list or press to answer th e silent call. Ending / rejectin g a call Press or press Reject .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Quick guide Quick guide â Adju sting th e earpie ce vol ume ⢠Press the volume keys on the left side of the phone. ⢠Automatic volume control (AVC) can be activated th rough Menu 4-1-1. See page 77. Last number redial Press in the standby mode to access the list of last dialled numbers. Scroll with or to the de sired number and press . Call ing yo ur vo ice m ailbo x Press and hold . If the phone asks for the voice m ailbox number , key it in an d press OK . Calling by us ing a voice tag First, you need to a dd a voice tag to a name, see â V oice dialling â on page 50. T hen press and hold Names and s ay the name to make a call. â Phone book functions Quick save Key in the phone number , press Options and select Save from the list. Key in the name and press OK . Quick find In the standby mode, press , key in the first letter of the name, scroll with or to the desired name.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Quick guide Quick guide â â Basic menu functions Entering a menu Press Menu , scroll with or to the desired menu function and press Sel ect . Exit ing a m enu Press to exi t a menu function without changing its settings and return to standby mo de. â Ke ypad lock functions Locking the keyp ad Press Menu , the n (with in 2 se conds). Unlockin g the keypad Press Unlock and then quickly . Auto mati c keyl ock a nd key lock c ode Y ou can als o set time delay to lock your keypad automatically and lock/unlock the keypad with a code, see page 8 1 for details.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 6 Contents Quick guide ........................................................ ....................................... ......................................... 3 Contents ..................... ........................................ .......................................................... ..................... . 6 For your safety ................................................... ....................................... ...................... ................. 15 General information ...................... ........................................................... ........................... ............ 17 Stickers in the sales package ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 17 Security c ode ......... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ .... ... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 17 Network serv ices ........ ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ .. ..... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .... 17 Accessories .. ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ..... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ...... 18 Typographics used in this guide .. ....... .......... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ..... ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... .... 19 1. Your phone ................................ ........................................................... ........................ ............... 20 Using your phone i n wet and damp conditions ........... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... ...... ....... ....... ........ ...... 20 Special feat ures ..... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ..... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .... 21 Keys of your phone.... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... ...... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .... 22 The sel ection keys .. ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ . ......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ...... 23 The display indic ators.......... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... .......... ....... ........ ....... .... 24 Standby mode .... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ......... 24 List of indic ators in the standby mode . ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... .. ... ....... .......... ....... ........ ...... 25 2. Getting started ............................................. ....................................... .......................... ............. 27 Installing the SIM card and the battery ..................................... .......................................... ........ ..... ....... .......... ....... ........ ...... 27 Charging the ba ttery ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ...... ...... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ...... 30 Switching th e phone on and off ........ ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ .. ..... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .... 31 If the phone ask s for a PIN code: ... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... .. ..... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .... 31
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 7 Contents If the phone ask s for a security code: ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ .. ..... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 31 3. Call functions ................................... ........................................................... ................. ... ........... 33 Making a call .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ..... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ...... 33 Interna tional calls ..... ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ... .. .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 33 Making a call using the phone book . ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .......... ........ ... .. ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ . 33 Last number redi al....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... . .... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... . 34 Making a call by saying a voice tag ......... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... .... . ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 3 4 Speed dialling a ph one number ................. ................................................................................. ... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 34 Calling your v oice mailb ox..................................................... ................................................ ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 35 Adjusting th e earpiece volume .... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... . ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 35 Answerin g a call .. ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... . ......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... . 35 Muting the ringin g tone ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .. ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 35 Rejectin g a call ...... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ..... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 36 In-call opt ions ...... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ..... ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 36 Call waiti ng ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ... ..... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 3 7 Call hol ding ......... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .. ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 37 Making a confe rence call .... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... . ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ...... 38 4. Phone book ................... ........................................ ........................................................ .............. 39 Phone book basics......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... . .... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... .... 39 Selectin g the phone book ......... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... . ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... .... 39 Copying phone books ...... .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ...... . ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ...... 40 Entering the phone book ..... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ... .. ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 4 0 Storing names and num bers......... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ . 41 Recalling a n ame and phone number .............................................................................................. ...... ....... .......... ....... ........ . 42 Organisi ng the phone book ...... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ... ..... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ...... 43 Editing a name and number... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ..... .. ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .... 43 Erasing a name and number ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .... ...... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 43 Further phone book functions ...... .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .......... .. ... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ . 44
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 8 Assigning a phone n umber to a speed dial key ... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ . ......... ....... ....... ........ . 44 Caller groups.. .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ . ...... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 44 Adding a name and phone numb er in a caller group .... .......... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ .......... . ...... ....... ........ . 44 Setting a ringing ton e and graphic for a caller group and renaming a caller group ........ ........ ......... ........ .......... . 4 5 Removing a name an d number from a caller group . ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ......... . ....... ........ ...... 46 Copying via infrare d .. .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... . ....... ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... .... 46 Copying a name and number from your phone ...... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ........ .. ....... ....... ........ . 46 Copying a name and phone number to your phone ...... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ..... ..... ....... ........ . 46 Sending and recei ving names and phone numbers ........ ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... .... 47 Storing mu ltiple numbers and text items per name ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ......... . ....... ........ ....... .... 47 Adding a new number or text item to a name: ........... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... . ...... ....... ........ ...... 48 To change the defau lt number: ........ ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... .... ....... .......... ....... ........ ...... 49 Setting the type of view for stored names an d numbers......... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... . .... ....... ......... 49 Service numb ers ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ..... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 49 Memory stat us ...... ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ .......... ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .... 50 Voice diall ing ......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 50 Adding a voice ta g to a phone number .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ..... .. ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 51 Making a call by using a voice tag ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ...... . ....... ........ ....... ....... ..... ........ . 52 Replayi ng, erasing or changing a voi ce tag.......... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... .... ....... .......... ....... ........ . 52 5. Using the Menu .... ........................................................... ........................................ ........ ........... 54 Accessing a menu fun ction by scrolling ......... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... . ...... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 54 Accessing a menu fun ction by using its shortcut number ...... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ...... .... ....... ........ ...... 55 List of menu functions ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ..... ... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ . 56 6. Menu functions ............................................ ....................................... ............................ ........... 59 Messages (Men u 1) ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ . 59 Writing an d sending text messages....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... ...... ........ ....... ....... ........ ...... 5 9 Predictive text input ......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ...... ...... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ . 60 Standard ans wers and t emplates .......... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... . .... .......... ....... ........ ..... ...... 63
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 9 Contents Inserting pic tures ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... . ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 63 Reading and vie wing text and picture mes sages ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ...... .... ........ ....... ....... .... 64 Replying to a message ... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... ... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... . 65 Special send ing options .... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ...... . ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ...... 66 Sending a text mes sage to multipl e recipients .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ... .... ........ ....... ....... .... 66 Sending a text mes sage by message profile.... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... .... .... ....... ........ ......... .... 67 Organis ing your messages..... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... . .......... ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ . 67 Inbox and Outbox fold ers ..... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ..... ... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ...... 67 Archive folder an d user-specified fold ers .......... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ .... ... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 68 Message s ettings ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 69 Settings common to all text messages ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 69 Setting for Mes sage profiles ..... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... . .... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 7 0 Call regi ster (Menu 2) .. ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 71 Missed calls (Men u 2-1) . ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 72 Receive d calls (Menu 2- 2) ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ .... ...... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 72 Dialled numbers (Men u 2-3) ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .. ..... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 72 Erase recent call lists ( Menu 2-4) ...... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ... .. ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 72 Call durati on (Menu 2-5) ...... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ... .... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 73 Call cost s (Menu 2-6) ...... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... .. ...... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .... 73 Profiles (Men u 3) ...... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ..... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ . 74 Activati ng a user profile ........ ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ . 74 Customisi ng Profiles ...... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... . ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 7 5 Settings you can personalise ......... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ .... ... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 75 Renaming profi les...... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .... .... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... . 76 Settings (Me nu 4) .... ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ...... ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 77 Call set tings (Menu 4-1) .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .. ..... ........ ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ . 77 Automatic vo lume control (Menu 4-1- 1) ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .... .... ....... ........ ....... ...... 7 7 Anykey answer ( Menu 4-1-2)..... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ..... ... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 78 Automatic redia l (Menu 4-1-3) ...... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... . .... ....... ........ .......... ....... ...... 78
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 10 Speed dialling (M enu 4-1-4) ........................................ ............................................................ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ...... 78 Call waiti ng service (Me nu 4-1-5) .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ . 78 Line for outgoing cal ls (Menu 4-1-6) .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ..... ..... ....... ....... ........ ....... .... 79 Summary after call (Menu 4-1-7) ...... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... . ....... ........ ....... .......... ...... 79 Fax or data call (Me nu 4-1-8) ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ...... 7 9 Own numbe r sending ( Menu 4-1-9) ......... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... . ....... ....... .......... ....... .... 79 Phone setti ngs (Menu 4-2) .......... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ...... ........ ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .... 80 Language (Men u 4-2-1) ....... ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ...... 80 Cell i nfo display (Menu 4-2-2 ) ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ...... ...... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 80 Welcome not e (Menu 4-2-3) ... ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ........ . ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ . 80 Network sel ection (Menu 4-2-4 ) ..... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ...... ....... ....... ....... .......... ......... 80 Display con trast (Menu 4-2- 5) .. ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ..... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ . 81 Confirm SIM serv ice actions (Me nu 4-2-6) ......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .. ..... .......... ....... ........ . 81 Keylock set tings (Menu 4-3) ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 81 Automatic keylock (Menu 4-3-1 ) ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 81 Keylock code (Menu 4-3-2) ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... .......... ...... 82 Change key lock code (Menu 4-3-3)........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ..... .......... ....... ........ ....... .... 82 Communic ation settings (Me nu 4-4) . ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ . 83 Info service (Menu 4-4-1)......... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ...... 8 3 Listen t o voice messages (Me nu 4-4-2)...... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... . ......... ....... .......... ........ . 83 Voice mail box number (Menu 4-4-3 ) ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 84 Service comm and editor (Menu 4-4-4 ) ... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ... ..... ....... ....... ........ ...... 84 Security se ttings (Menu 4- 5) ......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ...... ...... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... .... 84 PIN code request (Men u 4-5-1) ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ..... ... ....... ........ ....... .......... ...... 84 Call barring serv ice (Menu 4-5-2) ... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 85 Fixed dialling (Menu 4-5- 3) ................ ................................ ..................................... ............... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 85 Closed user group ( Menu 4-5-4).... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ............. ....... ....... ........ ...... 86 Security l evel (Menu 4-5-5) .. ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... .... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ......... 86
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 11 Contents Change of access codes (Menu 4-5-6) ... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ..... .. ....... ........ ....... .......... . 87 Restore factory settings (Menu 4-6) ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ...... ........ ........ ....... ....... ........ . 87 Call divert (Menu 5) ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .. ...... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 87 Games (Men u 6) ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... . ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ...... 88 To st art a new game ...... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... ... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 89 To st art a 2-play er game ..... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ..... ... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... .... 89 Game optio ns ...... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... . .... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... 89 Calcul ator (Menu 7) .......... ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ..... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ...... 90 Using the ca lculator....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .. ... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 90 Currency co nversion ...... ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... .. ...... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .... 91 Setting th e exchange rate in Cal culator ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ .... ........ ....... ........ ......... .... 91 Calend ar (Menu 8) ..... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... .... ... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... .... 92 Calenda r views ........... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... .... 92 Day view .... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ . 92 Note view ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ... .... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... .... 92 Week lis t ......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 9 2 Options li st of calendar views...... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ..... .. ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ . 93 Adding a calendar not e ..... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ...... . ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 93 When the phone alarm s for a note .......... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ...... . ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 94 Task jou rnal (Menu 9) .... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... ...... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 94 Restart (Men u 9-1) .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... . ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... .... 95 Add new (Menu 9-2) ......... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ...... ...... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 95 Find (Menu 9 -3) .... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 96 Edit (Menu 9-4 )....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... .... ... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ...... 9 6 Erase (Menu 9-5 ) .... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . ...... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ...... 96 History (Me nu 9-6) ..... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ... .... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 97 Details.... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ . 98 Send as SMS ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ . .... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ . 99 Transferring T ask journal data to a PC usi ng a cable . ......... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ... ....... ....... ....... ........ . 99
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 12 Transferring T ask journal data to a compat ible PC via infrared......... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ......... ...... ....... .. 100 Active w ork view ...... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ...... . ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... 100 Pause tas k ........... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... . ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ......... 100 Stop task .......... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 1 01 Add cost....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ..... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ....... 101 Add comment..... ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ..... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .. 102 Clock ( Menu 10) ......... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ... ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .. 103 Stopwatch (Menu 10 -1) ... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... .. ... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... 103 Split ti ming ......... ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ...... ....... ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ....... 104 Lap timing ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ..... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .. 105 Saving or reset ting times ..... ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .... ... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... .... 105 Viewing t imes ........ ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... .. 105 Deleting times...... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... 106 Stopwatch memory . ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .. ..... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... 106 Alarm clock (M enu 10-2) .... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... . ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .. 106 Time setti ngs (Menu 10-3) ... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .. 107 Show clock / Hide cloc k (Menu 10-3-1) ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... .... ... ........ ....... .......... .... 107 Set the time ( Menu 10-3-2)..... ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .. 107 Time format (Menu 1 0-3-3) ..... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ...... . .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... .. 108 Sound met er (Menu 11) ............. ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ . ...... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .. 108 Infrared (Menu 12 ) .... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... .... ........ ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 1 09 To send and rec eive data via IR ...... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ...... ...... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... 110 Checking t he status of an IR conn ection ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ..... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 1 10 Mobile Internet Services (WAP) ..... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... .... . ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ....... 111 Setting up the phone for the WAP services .... .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... . ....... ....... ....... .......... .. 111 Saving the set tings receiv ed as a text message ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ..... ....... ....... ........ .... 112 Keying i n the settings ma nually .......... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... 112 Editing th e settings . ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ..... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ....... 113 Accessi ng WAP pages ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ .... 114
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 13 Contents Activati ng a connection set ...... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... .. 114 Accessing a WAP page by openi ng the homepage......... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ... ..... ....... ....... .. 115 Bookmarks ........ .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .. ........ ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 115 Accessing a WAP page by entering its addre ss .......... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... .. ........ ........ ....... .... 116 Viewing W AP pages ........... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .. ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 116 Keys use d in WAP navigation ..... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ . .... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .. 116 Emptying t he cac he ....... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... ... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... .... 117 Security ce rtificates .. ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... ...... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 118 SIM servic es (Menu 14) ...... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... .. 119 7. Data and f ax communications ........ ....................................... ................................................. 1 20 Connecti ng your phone to a computer.......... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ... .... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 120 Installing commu nications applications and modem drivers ....................................................................... ........ ....... .. 120 Using communic ations applicati ons ...... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... .. ..... ........ ....... ........ ....... .... 120 8. Reference information . ........................................................... ........................................ .... ..... 122 Access c odes ........... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ..... .. ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .. 122 Security code (5 digi ts) .......... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... . ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 122 PIN code (4 to 8 digit s) ..... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ .... ... ........ ......... ........ ....... ........ ....... .... 122 PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits ) ............ ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... .... .... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... .. 122 PUK code (8 digits) .... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... .... .... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ....... 123 PUK2 code (8 digi t) ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... .. 123 Keylock code (4 digit) .... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ ..... ....... ........ ....... ....... .......... ....... ....... 123 Barring pass word ......... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... . .... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 123 Batter y information ...... ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ........ ....... ....... .. ...... ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ....... 123 Charging and disc harging the battery.......... ........ ....... ........ ......... ........ ....... ....... ........ .......... ....... .. ..... ........ ....... ........ ....... .... 123 Using the batte ries ............ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... 124 Care and maintenance....... ........................................ ........................................................... . ........ 126
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Contents 14 Important safety informatio n ........................... ....................................... ................................. .... 1 27 Technical specifications ..................................... ........................................................... ....... .......... 131
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. For your safety 15 For your safety For your safety Read these simpl e guidelines. Breaking the rule s may be dangerous or illegal. Furt her detailed information is give n in this manual. ROAD SAFETY COM ES FIRST Don â t use a hand-held phone while driving; park the ve hicle first. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may get interference which c ould affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any regulations or rules. Switch phone off near me dical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Wireless phones can ca use interference. Usin g them on aircraft is illegal. SWITCH OFF WHEN R EFUELING Don â t use phone at a refuellin g point. Don â t use nea r fuel or che micals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Don â t use phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. USE SENSIBLY Use only in normal position ( to ear). Don â t touch the antenna area unne cessarily .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. For your safety 16 USE QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified servic e personnel must ins tall or repair equipment. ACCESSORIES A ND BATTERIES Use only approved accessories and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. CONNECT ING TO OTHER DEVICES When connec ting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect in compatible products. Re member to m ake backup c opies of all i mportant data. MAKING CALLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. Enter the phone numbe r , including the area code, then press . To end a c all press . To answer a c all press . EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure t he phone is switched on an d in servic e. Press as many t imes as neede d (e.g. to exit a call, to exit a menu, et c.) to cle ar the d isplay. Enter the em ergenc y numb er , then press . Give your location. Do not end the call until told t o do so. INFRARED P RECAUTIONS Do not point the IR beam at anyones â s eyes or allow it to inte rfere with other IR device s.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. General information 17 General information General info rmation This chapter gives you s ome general information on your new Nokia phone and this user guide. â Stickers in the sales package The stickers contain important information for service and customer support purposes. Attach the sticker with th e text â ITEMâ and â IMEIâ on page 2 of this user guide. Attach the sticker to the Club Nokia Invita tion Card supplied in the sales package. â Security code The factory setting for the security code is 12345. To avoid unauthorised use of you r phone, change the code in the Settings / Security settin gs / Security lev el (Men u 4-5-5 ) and Chang e of a ccess c ode s (Menu 4-5-6). K eep the new code secret and in a safe place which is separate from your phone. â Network service s The wireless phone described in this u ser guide is approved for use on the EGSM900, GSM1800 an d GSM900/1 800 dua l-band ne tworks. Note that Dual band functionality is a network-dependent feature. Check with your local service provider if you ca n subscribe to and use the dual ba nd functionality . A number of f eatures included in this user guide ar e called network services. They are special services provided by wireless service providers. Before you can take advantage of any of these network services,
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. General information 18 you must subscribe to th ese service(s) from your home service provider and obtain instructions for their use. â Accessories Li-Ion battery BLL-2 is the m anufacturer-approved rechargeable battery available for your phone. This apparatus is intended for u se when supplied with power from ACP-7, ACP-8, and LCH-9 batter y chargers. Other usage will invalidate any approval given to th is apparatus and may be dangerous. Wa r ni n g ! Use only batteries, chargers and accessories approved by the phone manufacturer for use with this particular phone m odel. The us e of any other types w ill invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be danger ous. For availability of approved accessories, please check with your dealer . When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory , grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Please note that the a ccessories to be used with the Nok ia 6250 do not meet the same durabili ty or wat er resis tance spec ificat ions as t he phone it self . For example , all the char gers are only to be u sed in dry con dition s - NE VER when wet or damp.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. General information 19 General information WALL MOUNTING OF THE WALL/DESK STAND Wa ll/Desk Stand DCV-6 is a Nokia 6250 specific accessory . It has a wall mounting option for charging your Nokia 6250 ph one with Nokia chargers ACP-8 or ACP-7. The picture s eries below shows how the stand should be mounted on a wall. Note: The availability of partic ular products may vary by the region. Please check with the Nokia dealer nearest you. â T ypographics used in this guide The display texts which appear on the phone â s display are in dicated in italic typeface, for example Calling . The display texts related to the selection keys are indicated in bold typeface, for exam ple Men u . Only the selection key texts without th e key symbols are shown in the text. In this user guide all key presses are represente d by icons such as and .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Your phone 20 1. Y our phone The Nokia 6250 is a durable quality phone. Its advanced mechanical solu tions make it dust and wat er resistant; it can withstand temporary immersion in water w ithout harmful effects. It can take a considerable drop onto a hard surface. However , even though the phone is designed to meet your tough demands, it is not meant to be thrown around on purpose. It is a high-tech piece of equipment and should be treated as such. Repeated droppings may , over time, deteriorate the performance of your phone. The speaker , buzzer and microphone are sealed so as to be dust and water resistant. Therefore never use any sharp tools that can damage th eir coating. Even though the car anten na connector is made durable and water -resistant, keep the rubber cap (provided with the phone) in place when not using the active car kit to minimize the r isk of any small items and /or humidity e ntering the connector and possibly deter iorating the performance and /or water resistance of th e phone. â Using your phone in wet and damp conditions ⢠Never try to use the phone un der water . ⢠You ca n use this phone in the rain, but do n ot take it with you when you go e.g. swimming. ⢠If the phone, and especially the system connector , has been exposed to salt water , immediate rinsing with freshwater is recommended to avoid corrosion. The phone m ust be wiped dry carefully after it has been r insed.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Your phone 21 Your phone ⢠Before opening the back cover , the phone must be wiped dry to avoid water entering the interior of your phone. Th e SIM card and battery are n ot water resistant. ⢠Always remember that the accessories do not m eet the same durability or water resistance specifications as the phone itself . ⢠Never ch arge the phone when th e bottom connector i s wet or da mp. ⢠Never use a damp phone wi th accessories that have an electrica l functionality (e.g. Wall/Desk Stand, Adva nced HF Car Kit, etc.). â Special featur es Y o ur phone has many new features to meet your needs in tough enviro nments and elsewh ere. ⢠With the Ta sk journal (Menu 9) you can for example keep track of working times and costs. ⢠Stopwatch (Menu 1 0-1) enables the taking of intermediate times an d lap times. ⢠Sound meter (Menu 1 1) reveals the estimated noise level of your surroundings. ⢠Automatic volume control can be sele cted on or off with Menu 4 -1-1. ⢠Keypad can be locked automatically and with a code, see page 81. ⢠Display contrast (Menu 4-2-5) offers a selection of ten different contrast levels f or the display . ⢠Currencies can be converted in the standby mode if you have set the exchange r ate in Calculator (Menu 7). ⢠Timed profiles allow you to turn a profile on for a certain period of time, see page 74. ⢠The Quick silent feature mutes the ringing tone of an incoming call immediately . The silent call can be answered as usual, see page 35.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Your phone 22 â Keys of your phone Sele ction keys These keys perform the fun ction indicated by the text i mmedi- ately above them, e.g. Select or OK . Scroll k eys Use these keys to scroll th rough names, phone numbers, menus or setting options or to get quick access to the phone book. Dials a phone number and answers a call. Sends the ongoing call to Hold if pressed dur ing a call. In th e standby mode: shows the list of the most recently dialled numbers. Ends or rejects a call. Also exits from any function at any time. Enter num bers and characters. Pressing and holding of calls your voice mailbox. Used for various purposes in different functions.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Your phone 23 Your phone The selection keys Below the display you wil l find two selection keys: P ower key (1) Pressing the power key switches the phone on or off. Pressing this key br iefly while in the standby mode or during a call: enters the list of pr ofiles. Pressing the key briefl y while in the ph one book or menu func- tions: turns the display lights on for 15 seconds. V olume k eys (2) The upper key increases and the lower key de creases the ear- piece volume.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Your phone 24 The functions of th ese keys depend on the guiding tex ts shown above the keys. For example, when th e text Menu appears above the key , pr essing this key enters the menu functions. Similarly , pressin g the key under the text Names allows access to the phone b ook functions. Pressing and holding Names activates voice dialling. In this user guide, the selection keys are indicated by the relevant guiding text in bold ty pe. â The display indicators Display indicators and icons inform you about the opera tion of your phone. Standby mode The indicators described below are shown when the phone is ready f or use, with no characters entered by the user . This screen is ca lled standby mode. The Nokia 6250 has 7-bar battery and signal status indicators xxxxxx Indicates in which cellular network the phone is currently used.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Your phone 25 Your phone Shows the signal s trength of the cellular network at your current loca tion. The higher the bar , the stronger the signal. Shows the battery charge level. The higher the bar , the more power in the battery . List of i ndicators i n the standby mode The following icons may also be shown when the ph one is in the standby mode: Indicates that you have received one or several text or picture messages. See â Messag es (Men u 1) â on page 59. Indicates that you have r eceived one or severa l voice messages. Indicates that the phone does not r ing at an incoming call. See â Settings you ca n personalise â on page 75. Indicates that the phone â s keypad is locked. See â Keyloc k setti ngs (Me nu 4-3) â on page 8 1. Indicates that you have set the alarm clock . See â Alarm clock (Menu 1 0-2) â on page 106. Indicates that you have activated one or more call diverts. See â Call divert (Menu 5) â on page 87. Indicates that your calls ar e limited to a closed user group (network service). See â Closed user group (Menu 4- 5-4) â on page 86. Indicates that a task in the Task journal is still active. See â Task j ournal (M enu 9) â on page 94. Indicates that you have stopwatch timing going on in the backgr ound. See â Stopwatch (Menu 10- 1) â on page 1 03.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Your phone 26 Indicates that a profile i s timed, see â Profiles (Menu 3 ) â on page 74.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Getting started 27 Getting started 2. Gettin g started â Installing the SIM card and the battery ⢠Keep all miniatu re SIM cards out of the r each of small children. ⢠The SIM card and its contacts can eas ily be damaged by scratches or ben ding, so be careful when handling, inserting or r emoving the card. ⢠Before installing the SIM card, always m ake sure that the phone is dry and switched of f and only then remove the back cover . 1. With the back of the phone facing you, open the screw by pressing it lightly and turning it 90 degrees to the left.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Getting started 28 2. Remove the water resistant back cover by lifting it up. 3. Remove the BLL-2 battery if th ere is one. Note : When removing the back cover and battery , do not tamper with the other screws or the cover seals. If you do, you may invalidate the warranty. 4. Open the SIM card holder by pressing the middle wires from sides lightly and by releasin g the card holder from its place. 5. Insert your SIM card ensuring that the bevelled corner is on th e bottom right and the golde n contact area is facing downwards.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Getting started 29 Getting started 6. When SIM card is inserted, close the c ard holder downwards and press the wires from sides again to lock the card holder in to the slots. 7. Replace the battery . Note: Ensure you place the batt ery so that the electric contacts of the battery an d the phone touch on e another . Make sure the in terior of your phone and the back cov er seals are dry and clean, an d free of any foreign objects. For eign objects may damage the seals a gainst water . Never detach the cover seals .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Getting started 30 8. Attach the back c over and close it tightly by turning the screw 90 degrees to the r ight. â Charging the batter y Note: Never charge the phone when the bottom connector or phone itself is wet or damp! The charger should always be dry . 1. Attach the lead from the charger to the socket (A) on the bottom of your phone. 2. Connect the charger to an AC wall outlet or use the Nokia car accessories compatible with your ph one. The battery indicator bar starts to scroll. The text Charging is briefly displayed if the phone is switched on. Y ou can use the phone while charging. If the battery is totally empty , it may take a few minutes before the char ging indication appears on the display or any calls can be made. The charging time depends on th e charger and battery used. For example, char ging a BLL-2 battery with an ACP-8 charge r takes 2 hou rs 45 minute s.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Getting started 31 Getting started 3. The battery is fully charged wh en the battery indicator bar stops scrolling, and the text Battery full is briefly displayed (if the ph one is on). If the text N ot charging is displayed, charging has been suspended. W ait for a while, disconnect the charger , plug it in again and retry . If charging still fa ils, contact your dealer . â Switching the phone on and of f Press and hold the po wer key . If the phone ask s for a PIN code: The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card. ⢠Key in the PIN code (displayed as * ***), and press OK . See also â Access codes â on page 122. If the phone ask s for a se curity code: ⢠Key in the five-digit security code (displayed as *****), and press OK . See also â Access codes â on page 122. War ni ng! Do not switch on the phone when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interf erence or danger .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Getting started 32 Note: Your phone has a built-in antenna. As with any other radio- transmitting device, do not touch the antenna area unnecessarily when the phone is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may cau se the phone to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed. Not touching the antenna area during a call optimizes the antenna performance and th e talk time of your phone.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Call functions 33 Call functions 3. Ca ll functi ons â Making a call 1. Key in the phone number including the area code. To edit a number on the display , press or to m ove the cursor . Press Clear to delete the character to the left of the cursor . 2. Press or press Options and then select Call to call the number . 3. Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Norm al posi tion: Hold the phone as you would any other telephone. Internat ional calls 1. Press twice for the in ternational prefix (the character replaces the international access code). 2. Enter the country code, ar ea code, and the phone number . 3. T o call th e number , p ress . Making a call us ing the ph one book 1. Press Names . 2. Scroll to Search and press Select . 3. Key in the first letter or more of the n ame and press Searc h .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Call functions 34 Y ou can skip this step if you like. 4. Use and to reach the desired name. 5. Press to call the number . Tip: Y ou can enter the Phone book quick ly by pressing in the standby mode the scroll keys or . Last number redial The last ten phone n umbers you called or attempted to call are stored in the phone â s memory . To redial one of these last-dialled numbers: 1. When in the standby mode, press once to access the list of the last-dialled numbers. 2. Use or to reach the desired number or name and press . Making a call by saying a v oice tag Before you can make a call using voice tags, you m ust add the voice tag to a name. See â V oice dialling â on page 50. Speed di alling a ph one number If you have assigned a phone number to one of the speed dialling keys to , you can call that phone number in either of the following w ays: ⢠Press the corresponding speed dialling key an d press . ⢠If t he Speed dialling s set to On : Press and hold the cor responding speed dialling key ( to ) until the call is started.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Call functions 35 Call functions See â Assigning a phone number to a speed dial keyâ on page 44 and â Speed dialling a phone numberâ on page 34. Note: Pressing and holding dials y our voice mailbox number . Calling your voice mail box 1. Press and h old when in the standby mode. 2. If the phone asks for the voice mailbox number , key it in and press OK . Y ou obtain this number from your service provider . To edit this num ber at a later time, see â V oice mailbox number (Menu 4-4-3) â on page 84. Adjusting the earpiece v olume Y ou can adjust the earpiece volume of your phone during a call. Pr ess to increase and to decrease the volume level. See also â Automati c volume control (Me nu 4-1-1) â on page 77. â Answering a call 1. T o answer a call, press . 2. Press to end the ca ll. Muting the ring ing tone Y ou can m ute the ringing tone by pressing Options . Now you can answer the call either by selectin g Answer from the selection list or by pressing .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Call functions 36 Rejecting a call To reject an in coming call and to send the caller th e â line busy â tone, press or Reject . If the Divert if b usy function is activated â Call divert (Menu 5) â on page 87, the call is diverted for example to y our voice mailbox. â In-call options Y our phone provides a number of functions that you can use during a call. M any of the in-call options are network dependent. By pre ssing Options during a call some or all of the followin g in-call options may be available: ⢠AVC on or AVC off (to set the automatic v olume control on or off) ⢠Hold or Unhold (to put a call on h old or to re-activate a call) ⢠New ca ll (to make a call when you have a ca ll in progress) ⢠Send DTMF (to send D TMF tone strings stored in the phone b ook or keyed in manually , for ex ample, passwords or bank account numbers) ⢠End all calls (to end all ca lls) ⢠Phone bo ok (to access the phone book) ⢠Menu (to access the Menu) ⢠Mute or Unmute (to mute the phone â s microphone or converse) ⢠Swap (to switch between the active call a nd the call on hold) ⢠Tra ns fe r (to connect a call on hold with an active call and to disconnect you from both calls)
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Call functions 37 Call functions The options Co nfer ence , Pr ivate an d En d active c all are available when two or more calls are active simultaneously . You ca n make new calls during a call by selecting Ne w ca ll option. These incall-options are also network dependent. Call wait ing This network service allows you to answer an inc oming call while you have a ca ll in progress if you have activated the menu f unction Call w aiting service (Menu 4-1- 5). 1. Press Answer or . The first call is put on h old. 2. To switch between the two calls, press Swap or . 3. T o end the active call, press , (or to end both calls at the sa me time, press Options , scroll to End all calls and press OK .) Tip: If you do not want to answer t he call, you can ignore it or reject it. T o reject the call, press Options , then scroll to Reject and press OK . If you have activated the call divert Diver t if busy (Menu 5-2), a rejected call will also be diverted. Call holding This network service allows you to make another call while you have a call in progress. 1. Press Hold or press . The first call is put on hold. 2. Make the second call. 3. To switch between the two calls, press Swap or . To end the active call, press .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Call functions 38 Tip: Y ou can also mu te the line for a while. Press Opti ons , scroll with or to Mute . When you want to resume the muted call, press Unmu te . Making a conference call This network service allows u p to six persons to take part in a conference call. 1. Make a call to the first participant. 2. Pre ss Options and scroll to New c all and press Select . Make the call to the second participant. The first call is pu t on hold. 3. To join the first participant in the conference call, press Options , choose Conference and press Select . 4. To add a n ew person to the call, repeat the steps 2 and 3. 5. To have a private conversation with one of the participan ts: ⢠Press Options , scroll to Private and press Select , then scroll to th e desired participant and press OK . Once you have finished the private conversation, return to the conference call a s described in s tep 3. 6. To end the con feren ce call, press or select Op tions and then End al l cal ls .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 39 Phone book 4. Pho ne book â Phone book basics There are two separate memories you can store names and phone numbers to: ⢠the phoneâ s internal ph one book The phone â s internal phone book can store up to 255 names (each of which can have up to 50 characters) and phone numbers . You can store 3 numbers and one text note to a name. If you have less than 255 names stored in the phone â s internal phone book, you m ay be able to store up to 5 phone numbers and two te xt notes per name. ⢠the SIM card me mory The phone supports SIM car ds that can store u p to 250 names and ph one numbers. Y ou can u se only one memory at a tim e. Note: Certain features, such as storing m ultiple numbers and text items per name or attaching voice tags to numbers only wor k when the phone â s me mory is in use. If you have numbers s tored in th e memory of the SIM card, first copy them to the phone memory . Selecti ng the phone book Y ou can set the phone to use its internal phone book or the SIM card memory for s toring names and number s. 1. In the standby mode, press Names . 2. Scroll with or to Options an d press Select .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 40 3. Scroll to Memory in use and press Se lect . 4. Scroll to Ph one (to set the phone to u se its internal phone book) or SIM card (to set the phone to use the SIM card memory) and pr ess Select . Note: After the SIM card is changed, the SIM phone book is automatically selected. Copying phon e books Y ou can copy n ames and phone numbers from the p hone â s memory into your SIM card â s memo ry or vice versa. 1. In the standby mode , press Names . 2. Scroll to Cop y and press Select . 3. Scroll with or to the desired copying direction ( From phon e to S IM c ard or Fr o m SIM car d to phone ) and press Select . 4. Scroll to On e by on e , All or Defau lt Nos. an d press Select . If you selected One by on e , scroll to the name you want to copy and press Copy . Note that when you copy From SIM car d to Phone , the text Default N os. is not shown. 5. Select whether you want to keep the original nam es and numbers or not. 6. If y ou select ed All or Default No s. , pres s OK when the text Start copy ing? is displayed. Note that after pressing Copy or selecting All or Defaul t Nos. the selection list Keep original , Eras e original appe ars. Enterin g the phone boo k ⢠Press Names in standby mode, sc roll with or to the desired function and press Select .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 41 Phone book ⢠In standby mode, press or to enter th e phone book quickly . ⢠During a call: Press Options , scroll with or to Phon e book , and press Select when Search is highlighted. Storin g names and n umbers 1. Press Names , scroll to Add name and press Select . 2. Key in the name; press a number key ( to ) repeatedly until th e desired character or number appears. The most common punctuation marks an d special characters ar e available under the number key . To insert a sp ace, press . Note: All characters ava ilable under a number key are not pr inted on the key . The characters available under a number key depend on t he language selected in the menu 4-2-1. 3. Press OK . 4. Key in an area code and phone number , and press OK . If you wish to add a voice tag, see â Adding a voice tag to a phone number â on page 5 1. Writing te xt: ⢠If the next letter is located on the same key as the present one, press or (or wait until the cursor appears again ) and then key in the letter . ⢠To switch between upper case and lower case, press quickly . The symbol ABC or abc shown at the top of the display indicates the selected case. ⢠To insert a number , press and hold the key la belled with the desired number . To switch between letters and numbers, press and hold . Number mode is indicated by 123 at the top of the display .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 42 ⢠Pressing brings up a list of special characters. Move th rough the list to the desired character with or and press Use to insert it in the name. ⢠If you make a mistake, you can remove characters to the left of the cursor by pressing Cle ar as many times as necessary . Pressing and holding Clear will clear the screen. ⢠and move the cursor right and left, respectively . Tip Quick save : When in the standby mode, key in the phone number , press Options , and select Save . Then, enter the name and press OK . Or , if you wish, save the number only: key in the phone number and press and hold Options . Recallin g a name and phone numb er 1. In the standby mode , press Names . 2. Scroll to Search and press Select . 3. Key in the first character of the name (or , press Li st to access the list of nam es) you are searching for and press Search . 4. Press or until the desired nam e appears. 5. Once the desired name is highlighted press to call the highlighted name. Tip : To qu ickly access the list of s tored names and numbers, press or when the phone is in th e standby mode.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 43 Phone book Organi sing the ph one book Edit ing a name a nd nu mber 1. Recall the name or number you want to edit and press Details. Then press Options . 2. Scroll to Edit name or Ed it number and press Select . 3. Edit the name or number and press OK . Erasing a na me and number Y ou can remove n ames and phone numbers from the selected phone book one by one or all at once. To eras e a name and num ber 1. Recall the name and number you want to edit an d press Details. Th en pr ess Opti ons . 2. Scroll to Erase and press Sel ect . Note: If you ha ve stored multiple numbers per name, the option Erase deletes the name, all the numbers and th e text notes stored under it. To eras e all names and numbers 1. Press Names , scroll to Era se and press Select . 2. Scroll to Eras e all an d press Select . 3. Scroll to the phone book you want to erase ( SIM card or Phon e ) and press OK . 4. Press OK when the text A r e you sur e? is displayed and then key in your security code an d press OK .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 44 â Further phone book functions Assigning a ph one number to a speed dial key Y ou can set any of the number keys - to work as a speed dia l key . To do this you need to assign a phone number to a number key . 1. Pre ss Names and scroll to Spe ed dial s and press Select . 2. Scroll to the desired speed dial key (2 to 9), and press Assign . 3. Pre ss Search , and s croll to the name or number and press Select . 4. Pre ss Select to assign the displa yed number . After assigning a number to a spee d dial key , you can call, view or ch ange the number or undo the speed dial. See â Speed dialling a ph one number â on page 34. Caller gro ups Y ou can set th e phone to sound a specific ringing tone and show a selected graphic on the di splay when you receive a call f rom a particular name and phone number . To do this, first include a name and number in a caller group. Then, def ine a ringing tone and gr aphic for this group. Note: Y ou can set the phone to ring only upon receiving calls from n ames and numbers that belong to a specific caller group by using the Alert for setting under the Pr ofiles menu, see â Customising Profiles â on page 75. Adding a name and ph one num ber in a ca ller grou p 1. Pre ss Names , scr oll w ith or to Caller gr oups , and press Select . 2. Scroll to the desired caller group and press Select .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 45 Phone book 3. Scroll to Members and press Select . 4. Press OK when Add name is highlighted, then scroll to the desired name and pre ss Add . 5. If you have mor e than one number stor ed under the nam e, scroll to the n umber that you want to add to the caller gr oup and then press OK . Tip: Y ou can also add a new name to a caller group by recalling it from the phone book. At the desired number , first press De tail s and then Options . Scroll to Calle r gr oups and press Select . Scroll to the de sired caller group and press Select. Sett ing a ri nging tone and gra phic for a c aller group and re nami ng a ca ller group 1. Press Names , scroll to Caller grou ps and press Sel ect . 2. Scroll to one of the caller groups and press Select . 3. Scroll to one of the f ollowing settings and press Se lec t . ⢠Group ti tle . To rename the caller gr oup, key in a ne w name and press OK . ⢠Group ring ing t one . To set the phone to r ing a specific ringing ton e for the group, scroll to the desired tone and press OK . De fault is th e tone selected for the currently selected profile. ⢠Gro up gr aphic T o set the phone to display the group gr aphic, scroll to On and press OK . The option list inclu des options for viewing and sending ( Send gr aphic ) the graphic as an Over The Air (OT A) messa ge, if supported by your network. Y ou can also receive a new gr oup graphic to your phone as an OTA message. When you r eceive a group graphic, press Show , then press Options , select Save or Discar d and press Select . If you selected Save , reach the desired caller group and press OK .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 46 Removing a name and number from a caller group 1. Pre ss Names , scr oll t o Calle r groups and press Select . 2. Scroll to the desired caller group and press Select . 3. Scroll to Me mbers and press Select . 4. Scroll to the name you want to remove, press Options and scroll to Remove name and press OK . Copying via infrar ed Copying a name and n umber from your pho ne Using your phone â s infrared (IR) port, you can send phone book entries as bu siness cards to a compatible phone or PC which is running an appropr iate application. 1. Make sure that th e other phone or the PC is set up to receive data via its IR port. 2. Recall the name and phone number to be copied . 3. Pre ss Options , scroll to Send card via IR to copy the ph one number and name to an other phone or PC. 4. Pre ss Select . Copying a name and p hone number to your phone To copy names and phone numbers from a nother compatible phone. 1. Pre ss Menu , scroll to Infrared (Men u 12) and pre ss Se lect . You r phone is r eady to receive data through its IR port. The user of the other phone can now send the nam e and phone number via In frared.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 47 Phone book 2. Once the name and ph one number have been copied to your phone, press Show . Then press Options , sel ect Save or Discar d , and press Select . Send ing and rece iving na mes and pho ne numbe rs Y ou can send or receive a person â s contact information a s a business card eith er via IR or as an Over The Air (OT A) message if supported b y the network. To send a business card as an OT A me ssage, find the desired name and n umber from the phone book and then use the option Send car d . To se nd a business card via IR, use the option Send card via IR . See also Copying via infrared on page 46. When you rece ive a business car d, press Show . Th en pr ess Option s , select Save or Disc ard , and press Select . Note: Business cards are always stored in t he phone â s memory . Storin g multiple numbers and text it ems per name Y ou can use your phone as a con tact manager , since the ph one â s internal phone book allows you to store multiple phone numbers as well as text, such as an E -mail address, a street address or a note under a name. You can store up to 2 text items per name. The first number stored under a name is automatically set a s the default number . When you select a name from the phone book, e.g. to make a call or to send a message, the default number is used unless you se lect anoth er num ber . You can st ore u p to 5 number s pe r name .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 48 For each number or text item you can select a number type. If you do n ot select any number type, will be u sed as the number type. The default n umber is indicated by the box around th e number type icon, e.g. . Adding a new number or text item to a name: Multiple numbers can b e stored only in the p hone â s memo ry . Note: Before storing names and numbers, change the memory in use from SIM car d to Pho ne . For instructions, see â Selecting the phone bookâ on page 39. 1. Enter the names list, for example, by pressing or . 2. Scroll with or to the name to which you want to add a new number or text item and press D etails . 3. Pre ss Options and scroll to Add number or to Add text and press Select . 4. Scroll to one of the number or text types and press Select . Gene ral (def ault type when no other type is selected) Mobile Hom e Office Fa x Tex t t yp e s: E-ma il P ost al add. Note Y ou can later change the number or text t ype by using the Chan ge type option in the option list.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 49 Phone book 5. Enter the nu mber or enter the text and pres s OK to save it. 6. Press Opti ons (and then repeat steps 3 - 4) if you wish to continue adding numbers or text items to the na me. Press Back , and then Exit to e xit the phone book and to return to the standby mode. To change the default number: 1. Once in the names list, scroll to the desired nam e and press Details . 2. Scroll with or to the number you want to set as the default number , press Options . 3. Scroll to Set as d efault and press Select . Setting the type of view for stored names and numbers Y ou can set your phone to show the stored names and numbers in two different ways. 1. Press Names , scroll with or to Options and press Select . 2. Scroll to Ty pe of view and press Select . 3. Scroll to Name list (shows th ree names at a time) or Name & number (one name and phone number at a time ) and press OK . Service nu mbers By using this function you can easily dial any of the ser vice numbers your service provider may have stored in your SIM ca rd. This function is not displayed if there ar e no service numbers stored in your SIM card. 1. In the standby mode, press Names . 2. Scroll with or to Service No s. and press Select . 3. Scroll to the desired service number , press to call the number .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 50 Memor y status Y ou can check what percentage of the phone â s internal memory is in use or how many names and numbers are stored on the SIM card â s memory and how much m emory is still free. 1. When in the standby mode, press Names . 2. Scroll with or to Options and press Sele ct . 3. Scroll to Memory status and press Se lec t . The status of the SIM card is dis played. 4. Press or to see the status of the phone â s intern al me mory . â V oice dialling The voice dialling feature allows you to make phone calls by saying a voice tag that has been added to a desired phone number . Any spoken word(s) such as a person â s first name, surname and ty pe of number (e.g. m obile) can be a voice tag. Befor e us ing vo ice d ialli ng: ⢠Voice tags can be stored only in the phone â s memory . Save or copy the phone numbers, to which you want to add a voice tag, in your phone â s memo ry . ⢠When r ecording a voice tag or making a call by saying a voice tag, h old the phone in th e normal position near to you r ear . ⢠Voice ta gs are not language dependent. They are dependent on the speaker â s voice. ⢠Voice ta gs are sensitive to the background n oise; record voice tags in a quiet environment. ⢠Ve ry short names are not a ccepted; use long names and avoid similar n ames for different numbers. Note : The phone must be in a service area with adequate cellular signal str ength. Also, you must say the name exac tly as you said it when you recorded it. This may be difficult in , for example, a
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 51 Phone book noisy environment or du ring an emergen cy , so you should n ot rely solely upon voice dialling in all circumstances . Adding a voice ta g to a phone number V oice tags can only be added to the phone numbers stored in the ph one â s memory . First, change the memory in use from SIM card to Ph one , see â Selecting the phone book â on page 39 for instructions. Then, save a name and nu mber in the phone â s memory . 1. Press or to access the list of names. 2. Scroll with or to the name you w ant to add a voice tag to and press Details . 3. Scroll with or to select the number to which you want to add a voice tag. 4. Press Options and scroll with or to Add vo ice tag and press Select . 5. Press Start when the text Press Sta rt, then speak after to ne is displayed: The phone sounds a notification tone an d Please speak now is displayed. 6. Hold the phone near to your ear and say c learly the word(s) you want to r ecord as a voice tag after you hear the s tarting tone. 7. After recording the phone plays the r ecorded tag and Playi ng voic e tag is displa yed. If you do not want to save the recording, press Stop . 8. When the voice tag has been successfully saved, Voice tag saved is displayed and you can hear a beep. The voice tag is now stored in th e phone â s memory and the symbol appears above the phone number with the voice tag.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 52 Note : Only eight phone n umbers can have a voice tag. When the memory is f ull, delete some of th e voice tags. Ma kin g a ca ll b y u sin g a v oic e tag 1. In the standby mode , press and hold Names to start the voice dialling: A short tone is played an d Plea se spea k now is displayed. 2. Hold the phone in the normal position near to your ear and say the voice tag clearly . 3. The phone plays the name an d then automatically dials the number of the recognised voice tag after 1 .5 se conds. ⢠If th e text No voic e tags sa ved is displayed after you pr ess and hold Names , make sure that the phone â s memory is in use. Ma king a c all w hen us ing th e HDC- 9P he adse t 1. Press and hold the key on your headset: a short tone is played. 2. Say the voice tag clearly . 3. The phone plays th e recognised tag and then automatically dials the n umber of the recognised voice tag after 1.5 secon ds. Replaying, erasing or ch anging a v oice tag 1. In the standby mode , press Names to access the ph one book. 2. Scroll to Vo ice tag s and press Se lec t . Use scroll keys or to find the name with the voice tag you wish to replay , change or erase.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Phone book 53 Phone book To replay a voice tag: At the desired name, press Options , scroll to Play back and press Select . Hold the phone close to your ear to hear the voice tag. To erase a voice tag: At the desired name, pr ess Options , scroll to Erase and press Select . P ress OK when E rase voice tag? is displayed. To chang e a voice tag: ⢠At the desired name, press Opti ons , scroll to Change and press Select : Pres s start then speak after to ne is displayed. ⢠Press Start : The phone sounds a n otification tone and Please speak now is displayed. ⢠Say the new voice tag clearly . The phone r eplays the new voice tag and confirms that the new voice tag has been stor ed.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Us ing th e Menu 54 5. Using the Menu The phone offers a range of functions that allow you to t ailor the phone to your needs. These functions are arranged in men us and submenus. Most of the menu f unctions are provided with a brief help text. T o view the help text, scroll to the desired menu function an d wait for 15 secon ds. To exit the help text, pr ess Back . The menus and s ubmenus can be accessed by scrolling or by using th e shortcuts. â Accessing a menu function by scrolling 1. To access the menu facility , press Me nu . Press or to reach the desired main menu, e.g. Settings . Press Select to en ter the menu. 2. If the menu contains any submenus, fin d the one you w ant by scrolling with or . Press Select to enter the submenu (f or example Key lo ck set ti ng s ). 3. If the me nu you h ave s elected conta ins sub menus, r epeat step 2. Pre ss Select to enter the next submenu (for example Automa tic key lock ). 4. Press or to find the setting of you r choice and confirm the chosen setting. Tip: Y ou can return to th e previous menu level by pressing Back or exit the m enu without changing any settings by pressing and holding Bac k . Y ou can alw ays exit the menu without chan ging the menu settings by pr essing .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Us ing th e Menu 55 Us ing th e Menu â Accessing a menu function by us ing its shortcut number The menu items (menus, submenus and setting options) are numbered and can be accessed quickly by using their shortcut number . For menu shortcuts, see the list of menu fun ctions. 1. Press Menu . 2. Key in quickly , within two seconds, the index number of the menu function you want to access. For example, to set the Automatic keypad locking on: Press Menu , , and . ⢠Menu f or en terin g the menu ⢠for Settings ⢠for Keylock settings ⢠for Automatic keylock.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Us ing th e Menu 56 â List of menu functions 1. M essa ges 1. Write message 2. Inbox 3. Outbox 4. Arc hive 5. T emplates 6. My fol ders 7. Erase all 8. Mess age se tti ngs 2. C all reg ister 1. Missed calls 2. Recei ved calls 3. Dialled n umbers 4. Erase recent call lists 5. Call du ration 1. Last call duration 2. All calls â duration 3. Receive d calls â duration 4. Dialled calls â duration 5. Clear tim ers 6. Call costs 1. Last call units 2. All calls â units 3. Profile s 1. Gener al 1. Activa te 1. Contin uous 2. Timed 2. P ersonalise 1. Incom ing cal l aler t 2. Rin ging tone 3. Rin ging volume 4. Vibrating aler t 5. Message alert ton e 6. Keypa d tones 7. Warning tones 8. Alert for 2. Silent 1. Activa te 1. Contin uous 2. Timed 2. Personalise (sam e submenus as in Gener al) 3. Renam e 3. Meeting (same submenus as in Silent) 4. Outdoor (same submenus as in Silent)
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Us ing th e Menu 57 Us ing th e Menu 5. P ager (same submenus as in Silent) 6. Handsfre e 1 (same submenus as in General plus Automatic Answer and L ights) 7. Headset 2 (same submenus a s in General plus Automatic Answer.) 4. Settings 1. Call settings 1. Automatic volume control 2. Anykey answer 3. Automatic redial 4. Spee d dialling 5. Call w aiting service 6. Line for outgoing calls 3 7. Summary after call 8. Fax or data call 9. Own numb er sendi ng 2. Ph one settings 1. Langu age 2. Cell info display 3. Welcome note 4. Netw ork selection 5. Display con trast 6. Confirm SIM ser vice actions 3. Keylock settings 1. Automatic keylock 2. Keylock code 3. Change keylock 4. Communication settin gs 1. Info service 2. L isten to voice messages 3. Voice mailbox number 4. Service command editor 5. Security settings 1. PI N code request 2. Call barring service 3. Fixed dialling 4. Closed u ser group 5. Security level 6. Change of access codes 1. C hange security code 2. C hange PIN code 3. C hange PIN2 code 4. C hange barring pas sword 6. Restore factory settin gs 1. Profile is shown only if the phone is or has been used with the CARK1 1 1 car kit. Activation of the profile is automatic. 2. Profile is shown only if the phone is or has been used with the HDC-9P headset. Activation of the profile is automatic. 3. If your SIM car d does not support Line for out going calls function, the numbering of Summary afte r call, Fax and data call and Own number sending changes.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Us ing th e Menu 58 5. C all div ert 1. Divert all voice calls 2. Divert if busy 3. Divert if no t answe red 4. Divert if out of reach 5. Divert if not available 6. Divert all f ax calls 7. Divert all data calls 8. Cancel all diverts 6. G ames 1. Snake II 2. Opposite 3. P airs II 4. Setti ngs 7. C alcul ator 8. C alen dar 9. Ta sk journal 1. Restart 2. Add ne w 1 3. Find 4. Edit 5. Erase 6. History 10 . Cl o ck 1. Stopwatch 2. Alarm clock 3. Time setting s 1 1. Sound meter 12.Infrared 13. Services 1. Home 2. Bookmarks 3. Settings 4. Go to addr ess 5. C lear the cache 14.SIM serv ices 2 1. This is the only menu item shown if there are no previous tasks in the Task list. 2. Only shown if supported by your SIM card. The name and contents vary depending on the SIM card.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 59 Menu functions 6. Menu functions â Messages (Menu 1) Within the Messag es menu you can read, write and send text messages of up to 160 ch aracte rs or save your own message s in the folder s for later use . Note : The message centre number is often stored to your SIM card, but if it â s not, yo u need to sto re it inthe Message centre number option under Me ssage sett ings before you are able to sen d or receive any mess ages. Contact your se rvice provide r for the messag e centre numbe r . Writing a nd sendi ng text mess ages Within the Write me ssage menu you can write and edit text messages of up to 160 characters. Y ou can use: ⢠traditional text in put, indicated by To insert a character , you need to press the key labelled with the required letter as many times as is necessa ry . For more information, see â Storing names and n umbers â on page 4 1. ⢠predictive text input, indicated by . When writing complete words, for inserting a characte r you need to press the key with the corresponding letter on ly once. 1. In the standby mode, press Menu , pres s Select when Messa ges is displayed. 2. Press Select whe n Wri te m es sag e is displayed. 3. Key in a messa ge.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 60 Tip: When writing a text message, the phone uses the tex t case, which automatically writes the first character of a senten ce in upper case. Y ou can also insert templates (see â Standard answers and templates â on page 63) and pictures (see â Inserting pictures â on page 63) in to your messages. 4. To send the messa ge, press Options . 5. Pre ss Select when Send is highlighted. The option list includes options for sending, saving and erasing the mess age you are writing. Tip: Y ou can also send the messa ge by pres sing after you hav e writ ten it. 6. Enter the recipient â s phon e number , or recall the phone n umber from phone book by pressing Search . Find the desired number and press OK . 7. Pre ss OK to send th e message. Predictive text input Predictive text input allows you to key in any characters by single keypress es when writing complete words. This text in put is based on a bu ilt-in dictionary to which you can add new words. Selecting the language for predicti ve text input 1. Pre ss Menu , pres s Select when Message s is displayed. 2. Pre ss Select when Wri te m es sag e is displayed. 3. Pre ss Options and scroll to Diction ary and press Select . Note : Predictive text input is only available for the languages listed in the dictionary option list.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 61 Menu functions 4. Scroll to the desired l anguage and press Select . T9 dict ionary activa ted is displayed and the predictive text input is now on, indicated by . Y ou can change from the predictive text input to the traditional text input by pressing Options and scrolling to Dic t ion ary . Select Diction ary off and press Select .. T9 di ctiona ry de activ ated is displayed. Tip: Press and hold Options to qu ickly activate or de-activate the predictive text input. Alternatively , press twice. Writing wo rds wit h predictiv e text i nput 1. Start writing a word by using the keys to . Press each key only once for on e letter when writing complete words. For ex ampl e, to wr ite hello with the English dictionary selected: The word changes af ter each keystroke - ignore how the word appe ars on the display before you have keyed in all its ch aracters. ⢠To delete a ch aracter , press Clear . ⢠To change the ch aracter case, press . ⢠To change between letter and n umber mode, press and hold . ⢠To in sert a word , pr ess Options . Scroll to Inse rt word and press Select . Wr ite the word an d press Save .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 62 ⢠To insert a s ingle number in character mode, press a nd hold the respective number key . ⢠To insert several nu mbers, press Options . Scroll to Insert number and press Sel ect . Key in the desired numbers and press OK . ⢠To insert a s ymbol, press and hold . Select the desired symbol a nd press Use Alternatively , press Options , scroll to Ins ert symb ol , and press Select . Scr oll to the desired symbol and press Use . 2. When you have finished writing the word and it is correct, confirm it by pressing or adding a space with . 3. If the word is correct, start wr iting the next word. If the wor d is not correct, you h ave the following options: ⢠Press repeatedly until the desired word appears and confirm it. ⢠Press Options , scroll to Next match and press Select . Nex t match is shown in the editor . If the ? character is displayed after the word, the w ord you intended to write is not in the dictionary . To a dd the word to the dictionary , press Spell . Addi ng the de sired wo rd to the m atch lis t 1. If no ma tches are found in the predictive text input mode, you can insert a new word into the dictionary . Press Spell and key in the desired word u sing traditional text input. 2. Pre ss Save . Note: When the dictionary is full, the new word replaces the least u sed word in it. Writing compound word s 1. Key in the first part of the word and accept it by pressing .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 63 Menu functions 2. Write the last part of the com pound word and accept the word by pressing or . Stand ard an swer s and te mpl ates Y our phone offers you a list of standard answers and templates that you can use in replying to messages. Y ou can also use templates when writing messages. Y ou can find th e list of default templates in the Templ a te s folder of the Messag es menu. Y o u can edit the text message templates to your liking, but the original templates will be r estored when the Menu 4-6 is sel ected ( Res tore factory settings ). To inser t a temp late: 1. When i n Wri te me ssa ge menu, press Options . 2. Scroll to Ins ert template and press Select . 3. Scroll to the desired template and press Select . The icon is displayed in front of text message templates. The icon is displayed in front of picture message templates. Inse rtin g pict ure s Y ou r phone offers you 1 0 picture message templates. You can also save new picture templates into the Tem pl a te s folder. More templates can be found on th e Nokia we bsite (http://www .club.nokia.com). Note: This function can be used only if it is supported by your network ope rator or service provider. Only phones that offer the picture messages f eature can receive and display picture message. To insert a picture in a text me ssage: 1. When in the message editor , press Options . 2. Scroll to Attach picture and press Select . The list of picture message templates is displayed.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 64 3. Scroll with or to the desir ed picture message template and press Select to view it. Note : Picture templates have default titles but you can change them by selecting the option Rename and keying in th e new title. 4. To insert the picture into your message, press Use . When th e picture h as been at tached to your message, the text Picture atta ched is displayed and the ph one returns to the message editor . The indicator means that the picture has been attached. The nu mber of characters that you can enter in a picture m essage depends on the size of the picture. 5. If you want to see the text and the picture together before sending the message, press Opti ons , scroll to Pr eview and press Select . If you want to change the attached picture, select the option Repl ace pic ture . If yo u want to remove the attached picture, select the option Remove picture . 6. To send the messa ge, press Options and select the option Send . ⢠Note that each p icture message is made up of several text m essages. Therefore, sending one picture message may cost m ore than s ending one text me ssage. ⢠Since picture me ssages are saved in the phoneâ s m emory , you can not view them if you use the SIM card with another ph one. Reading and view ing text and pictur e message s When you ha ve received a text or pictu re message, the indicator and the number of n ew messages followed by Message(s) received will appear on the display . 1. Pre ss Show to view the m essage or press Exit to view it later .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 65 Menu functions To read the te xt message l ater: Once in th e Messa ges menu, scroll to Inbox and press Open . Scroll to the desired message and press Select to read it. An unread text message is indicated by the icon in front of it. The message is stored in the Inbox folder after you have read it. To view t he picture mes sage la ter: Once in th e Messa ges menu, scroll to Inbox and press Open . Scroll to the desired message and press Select to view it. An unviewed picture message is indicated by the icon in front of it. 2. While reading and viewing the message, press Opt ions to scroll through the list of option s and press Select at the highlighted option to select it. The option list includ es options for erasing, replying, f orwarding, moving, editing, and ren aming the message you are reading. Y ou can also chan ge the font size of the message you are reading. ⢠Note that wh en you are replying to a picture message, only the text is copied to your reply message. When you a re editing a picture message, only the text can be edited, not the picture. ⢠If you want to save the picture for later use select the option Sav e picture : the picture is saved in the Temp l at e s folder . Y ou can also copy th e message to your phone â s calendar as a remin der note ( Copy to cal. ). The Details option shows you, e.g., the sender â s name and phone num ber , message centre used for sending, reception date and time. If you want to extract numbers from the current message, use the option Use number , or press . Replyi ng to a messa ge 1. Once in a message you want to reply to, press Opt ions , scroll to Reply or to Re ply ( text ) if you are replying to a picture m essage, and press Select .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 66 2. Scroll to one of the following reply ty pes and press Select . ⢠Empty screen. Original message is not included in the reply message. ⢠Orig . mess age. Ori ginal message is included in the reply message. ⢠Standard answers, e.g. Ye s , Thank you or Congratulatio ns . Only the selected sta ndard answer is included in the reply message. The standard answer can also be modified and additional text can be added. ⢠Template . T he selected template is included in th e beginning of the reply message. The template text can be modified and additional text ca n be added. 3. If y ou select ed Te mp la te , the list of templates, including e.g. Please c all or See you in , is displayed. Scroll to the desire d template and press Select . 4. Write your reply messa ge and press Options , scroll to Send and pr ess Select . Press OK to send the message to the displayed number. Special sending opt ions Sending a text mes sage to mult iple reci pients Y ou can send a message to multiple recipients. When sending a reply messa ge, use the Multiple copies option under Forw . o ptions , and when writing and sending a message, use Mult iple copies unde r Send optio ns . 1. Afte r you have wr itten the message, p ress Options , scroll to Send options and press Se le ct . 2. Scroll to Mult iple copies and pr ess Select : the list of names is displayed. 3. Scroll to the desired name a nd press OK to send the message. 4. Then select the next recipient and pr ess OK .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 67 Menu functions 5. When you do n ot want to send the mess age to any more recipients, pr ess Don e . Send ing a text message by messag e profil e Y ou can send or forward a text message, for example to a fax number, by using the Messag e profile option under Se nd option s or under Forw . options if th is profile is supported by you r network. For example, in order to send a text message to a f ax, you first need to define one message profile under the mess age settings for fax transmission s. See â Message settings â on pa ge 69. 1. Afte r you hav e writte n the messa ge, sel ect Messa ge profile . 2. Scroll to the message profile you have defined for fax transmissions and press Select . 3. Enter the fax numb er or recall it from the phone book an d press OK . Tip: If you ha ve stor ed the fax nu mber und er the Default r ecipient number setting of the selected message profile, the phone automatically s uggest that number . Press OK to accept the number . Organisin g your messages All the messages s tored in your phone â s message memory a re organised in folders. Inbox and Out box fo lder s After you have read an incoming text or picture message, the phone stores the message in the Inbox folder of the Me ssages men u. When you save a messag e you have written and/or sent, the phone stores the messa ge in the Ou tbo x folder . Note: The blinking icon indicates that the message memory is full. Before you can receive new messages, delete some of your old messages.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 68 Archive folder a nd user-specified folders If you want to ma ke sure that certain me ssages will not be overwritten when the m essage memory becomes full, or if you want to further organi se your messages, you can move some of your messages to the Arch ive folder or you can add new folders under the Me ssages men u and store some of you r messages there. Adding a folder: 1. Onc e in t he Message s menu, scroll to My fo lders and press Open . 2. Pre ss Options a nd scroll to Add folder and press Select . Enter the name of the new folder and pr ess OK . Dele ting the con tents of a single f older or of all the fold ers: 1. Onc e in t he Message s menu, scroll to Er ase all and press Select . 2. Do either of the following: Scroll to the folder whose con tents you want to delete and press OK . Th en pr ess OK at the prompt Erase all r ead messages from folder? Or Scroll to All read and press OK to erase all read m essages from all the f olders. Then press OK at th e prompt Erase all read messages from folder? Del eting a fo lder: 1. Onc e in t he Message s menu, scroll to My fo lders and press Open . 2. Scroll to the folder you want to delete and press Options . 3. Scroll to Remove fold er and press Sel ect . Note : When you delete a f older , all the messages con tained in that folder are also deleted.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 69 Menu functions Movi ng or eras ing a text or pi cture me ssage: 1. Once in the desired message, press Options . 2. Scroll to Move or to Erase and press Sel ect . 3. If you want t o move a message, scroll to the selected folder name and pres s OK . Message se ttings To access the message s ettin gs list: 1. Once in t he Messa ges menu, scroll to Mess age se ttings and press Se lect . 2. Scroll to the settin g you want to set a nd press Select . There are two kinds of message settings in your phone: message profile specific s ettings and settings common to all text messages. A message profile is a group of settings needed for sending text messages. The ph one uses the settings Message centre number , Mess ages se nt as and Message validity und er the Mess age set tings me nu as a default message profile if you do not select another set when sending a message. When, for examp le, you reply to a text message and select Send or when you wr ite a text me ssage and sel ect Send , th e phone automatically uses the default message profile. Y ou can also send a text message to a fax or to an e-mail address (if supported by your service provider) if you have defined a m essage profile with proper settings for fax or e-mail transmissions. See also â Special sending optionsâ on page 66. Setti ngs co mmon to all text mes sages The following message settings under the Messa ge setting s menu are common to all outgoing text messages, irrespective of th e selected set.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 70 ⢠Delivery reports Y ou can request the network to s end delivery reports on your text messages ( network service). A delivery report is indicated by in front of the m essage header . ⢠Reply to you via same centre This network service a llows the recipient of your text message to send you a reply message via your text message ce ntre. Sett ing for M essa ge p rofil es 1 Within the Messa ge profiles submenu of the Mes sage setting s you can change the settings of a particular message profile 2 . Each of the m essage profiles has its own submenu w ith the following functions: ⢠Message centre number With this submenu you can store the pho ne number of the messa ge centre needed for sending text messa ges. ⢠Mess ages se nt as For normal text messages, select the option Tex t , for fax transmission, select th e option Fax , etc. Note that you can only use the options Fa x , E-mail an d Pa g i n g , if your messaging service offers the facility to convert the text m essages into these alternative formats. Contact your service provider for availability of this function. 1. The message profiles menu is only displayed if your SIM card supports more than one set. Each set appears in its own submenu and may have any name. 2. The number of sets depends on how many set s your SIM card offers.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 71 Menu functions ⢠Message vali dity This network ser vice allows you to set the l ength of time that your text m essages are stored at the message centre while attempts are m ade to deliver them. ⢠Default recipient number The phone will suggest the number store d under this option as a default number for text message sending when this message prof ile is selected. ⢠Messa ge profile name Allows you to rename each message profile. â Call register (Menu 2) Within this menu you can view and delete phone numbers registered by th e phone, and view the approximate length and c ost of your calls (network serv ice) . In the options of th e missed calls, received calls or dialled numbers you can: ⢠call the number ⢠save the number in the phone book ⢠view the date and t ime of the call ⢠view , e dit or erase th e number f rom the list Note: The phone registers m issed and received calls only if the network supports Calling Line Identification (CLI), and th e phone is switched on and within the networ k â s service area.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 72 Missed calls ( Menu 2-1) This function allows you to view a list of the last ten phone numbers from which somebody has tried to call you with n o success (network ser vice). Tip : When a note about missed calls is being displayed, press List to see the phone number . To call back immediately , press . Received call s (Menu 2-2) This function allows you to view a list of the ten phone numbers from which you have most recently accepted calls (network service). Diall ed number s (Menu 2- 3) This function allows you to view a list of th e ten phone number s that you have most r ecently dialled, i.e. call ed or tried to ca ll. Tip: To quickly access the list of last dialled numbers, pre ss once when the phone is in the standby mode. Erase recent call li sts (Menu 2-4) This function allows you to delete all the phone numbers which appear in Menus 2-1 â Missed calls â , 2- 2 â Received callsâ and 2- 3 â Dialled numbersâ . Thes e phon e numb ers are also er ased wh en yo u: ⢠switch on the phone with a SIM ca rd inserted that is not on e of the five SIM cards used m ost recently with the ph one.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 73 Menu functions ⢠change the â Security levelâ setti ng (Menu 4- 5-5). Call duration (Me nu 2-5) This function allows you to view the duration of your in coming and outgoing calls in h ours, minutes and seconds. Y ou can also (by f irst entering the security code) clear the call timers. See â Access codes â on page 122. Note : The actual time invoiced for c alls by your service provider may var y , depending upon network features, roun ding-off for billing, and so forth. Call costs (Menu 2-6) This network service allows you to check the cost of your last call or all calls. The call costs are shown separately for each SIM card.Y ou can limit the costs of your calls to a certain a mount of charging units or units of currency by using the option Call cost limit . Y ou can make and receive charged calls as long as the specified cost limit is not exceeded. The number of remaining units is shown in the standby mode. Y ou m ay need the PIN2 code to set the cost limit.Y ou can set the phone to show the remaining talk-time (cost limit) in terms of charging units or un its of currency by using the option Show cost . Y ou may need the PIN 2 code to select th e currency or u nit. Contact your serv ice provider for charging un it prices.The option Clear counter s allows you to reset the call cost counters. To clear th e counters you need the PIN2 code. See â Access codes â on page 122. Note : When no more charging or currency uni ts are left, on ly calls to the emer gency number programmed into your ph one (e.g. 1 1 2 or other official number) may be possible. The actual time in voiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depending upon network features, roun ding-off for billing, and so forth.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 74 â Profiles (Menu 3) Within the Pr ofiles menu, you can adjust and cu stomise the phone tones for different events, environments and caller groups. Mos t profiles can also be set on for a certain period of time. Note: You can also change the profile by pressing the power key and selecting the requ ired profile with the scroll keys. It is not possible to select Timed profiles via pressing the power key . Acti vating a us er prof ile If you want to change t he currently selected profile ( Gener al as defa ult): 1. Press quickly in sta ndby mode. 2. Scroll with or to the profile you want to activa te and press OK . OR 1. Pre ss Menu , scroll to Profile s and press Select . Sc roll with and to the profile you want to activate and press Options . Confirm the activation of the profile with OK . 2. Select Continuous if you want to activate the selected profile f or an indefinite time. The chosen profile remains active until you activate another profile. 3. Or se lect Timed if you want to set a n expiry time for the profile (within the next 24 hours). In standby mode a timed profile is displayed with a c lock indicator . Note : Y ou must set the phone â s c lock before you can time a profile. See â Set the time (Menu 1 0- 3- 2) â on page 1 0 7. 4. Enter the value in hours and minutes after Expiry time . 5. Confirm the given time value w ith OK .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 75 Menu functions Note: If you switch the phone off or connect it to t he car kit or to the headset the timed profile is terminated. Customising Profiles 1. Press Menu , scroll to Pr ofiles and press Select . The following list of options appears: Ge neral , Silent , Mee ting , Outdoor , Pa ge r , Handsfree , He adset . Note: Handsfr ee and Headset will not appear in the Profiles list unless the CARK1 1 1 car kit or the HDC-9P headset are connected to your phone. However , the settings for the Hands free and Headse t will remain in the menu once connected. 2. Scroll to the desired p rofile and press Options . 3. Select Pe rs onalis e and press OK . Note: When the phone is connected to the car kit CARK1 1 1 or to the headset HDC-9P , the Ac tivate function will not be available. 4. Scroll to the settin g you want to customise an d press Select . 5. Scroll to the desired o ption and press OK . Sett ings y ou ca n pers onal ise Once you have selected the option Per sonalise , you can customise the f ollowing settings of the selected profile: ⢠Incoming call alert to define how the phone notifies you of an incoming voice call. T he options are: Ringing , Asce nding , Ring once , Beep once and Off . When Incoming ca ll alert is set to Off , no ringing tone or other alert tones will be heard. This silent mode is indicated by , however , in Silent and Meeting profiles only .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 76 ⢠Ringing tone to set the ringing tone type for voice calls. Tip: Y ou can also receive ringing tones via O TA. Y ou can store five ringing tones at a time in the ringing tone list. ⢠Ringing volume to set the volume level for the ringing and message aler t tones. ⢠Vibrat ing alert to set the phone to vibrate at an incoming voice call and at incoming text me ssage. The vibrating alert does not work when the phone is connected to a charger or desktop stand. ⢠Mess age alert tone to set the ringing tone type f or text messages. ⢠Keypad t ones to set the volume level for keypad tones or to set the keypad tones off . ⢠War ni ng t one s to set the warning tones on or off. For example, when set to on, th e phone sounds a warning tone when th e battery is running o ut of power . ⢠Auto matic answer (i n Handsfre e and Headse t profiles only) to set the ph one to answer an incoming voice call after a few seconds. Note : This function can only be used when your phone is connected to a headset or to a car kit equipped with the ignition sense option, with the ignition switched on . ⢠Alert for to set the phone to ring only upon calls from ph one numbers which belong to a selected caller group. Use the scroll keys or to reach the desired group and press Mark . To set a ringing tone and a group gr aphic for a caller group, see page 4 5. Rena ming profi les Y ou can rename the profiles to your perso nal liking except for the General , Hand sfree and Heads et profiles.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 77 Menu functions 1. Press Menu , scroll with or to Profiles and press Select . 2. Scroll to the profile you want to rename and press Options , then scroll to Rename and press OK . 3. Enter the n ew name and press OK . To enter letters, se e â Storing names and numbers â on page 4 1. â Settings (Menu 4) Call settings (Menu 4-1) Automat ic volum e control (Menu 4-1- 1) Automatic volume con trol (AVC) controls the earpiece â s volume level according to the environment noise level. If the environmental noise and/or level of received speech increases or decreases, AVC changes also the earpiece â s volume level accordingly and keeps the volume at a right level respectively . Automatic volume control can be activated by u sing menus or you can select it du ring an active call. Note: AVC on/ AVC off setting du ring an active call affects only the current call. Note: The usage of Automatic volume control is possible only in handportable mode. If you are using the phone in any other modes (for example in Headset mode or in Handsfree mode) the options AVC on/ AVC off ca nnot be selected during a call under Opti ons or th rough t he me nu. Activating Auto matic volume control via a menu 1. Press Menu , first select Settings , then Call settings . 2. Select Au to mat ic vo lu me co nt rol . 3. Choose e ither Off or On . The default is Off .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 78 Activating Automatic volume co ntrol during a call 1. Pre ss Options during an active call. 2. Select AVC on if you want to activate the AVC or select AVC o ff if you want to turn the automatic volume control off. If you increase the volu me level during an active call by pressing , the phone â s volume level increases regardless of AVC bein g on or off. When you end the call, the volu me level returns to th e level previous to AVC adjustment. Note: If AVC has changed the volume leve l and you deactivate the AVC du ring a call, the volume level stays at the level the AVC has adjusted it to. Anykey answer (Menu 4-1-2) When this function is set on, you can answer an incoming call by pressing any key briefly, except and . T he facility to answer a call by pressing Reject is not available when th is function is on. Automatic redial (M enu 4-1-3) When this function is set on, your phone will make up to ten attempts to connect the call after an unsucces sful call at tempt. Speed dial ling (Menu 4-1-4) When this function is set to on, the names and pho ne numbers assigned to the speed dial ke ys to can be dialled by pressing and holding the corresponding number key . Note that pr essing and holding the key dials your voice mailbox number . Call wait ing service (Menu 4-1-5) When this network ser vice is activated, the networ k will notify you of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress. See â Call waiting â on page 37.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 79 Menu functions Line for outg oing call s (Menu 4-1-6) The SIM card may be used with two subscriber numbe rs i.e. with two phone lines. With in the menu 4- 3-5, you can select the desired line for making calls. Y ou can also prevent the line selection. For more information on availability , contact you r network operator or service provider . If you select line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you w ill not be able to make calls. However , calls on both lines can be answered regardless of the selecte d line. Y ou can prevent th is menu function from being used by selecting the option Lock from the option list. Tip: You can switch from one line to the other by pressing and holding in the standby mode. Summary after cal l (Menu 4-1- 7) When you set this f unction to on, the phone will briefly display th e approximate duration and cost (network service) of the las t call. Fax or da ta ca ll (Men u 4- 1-8) Within this menu, you can make a fax or data call. Before using this function you need to activate the IR port of your phon e within the Menu 9 or to con nect your phone to a compatible device (for example, a fax machine). Own number sending (Men u 4-1-9) This network service allows you to set your phone number either to be dis played or hidden from the person you are calling. Set by network resets the phone to the default setting, On or Off , that y ou have agreed upon with your service provider .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 80 Note: The numbering of the Summary after call , Fa x or dat a call and Own n umber sending menus may vary depending on whether your SIM c ard supports the Line for outgoing calls function or not. Phone set tings (Menu 4-2) Language (Menu 4-2-1) Within this menu you can select the language in which the display te xts will be shown. If the settin g Auto matic is selected, the language used is chosen based on the current SIM car d. Language setting also affects the time and date formats of the following functions: A larm cl ock (Menu 10 - 2 ), Time settin gs (Menu 1 0-3), Calendar (Menu 8), Task j o ur na l (Menu 9). Cell info d isplay (Men u 4-2-2) This network service allows you to set the phone to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on Micro Cellular Netw ork (MCN) technology (networ k service). Welcome note (Menu 4-2-3) This menu allows you to set the message that is shown briefly when the ph one is switched on. Network selection ( Menu 4-2-4) The network to which you are connected can be selected either automatically or manually . In Automatic mode the phone automatically selects one of the cellular networks availa ble in your area; the selected network can be GSM900 or GSM1800. In Manual mode the phone will show a list of the available networks and you ca n select the network you wish to use if th is network has a roaming agreement with your home network operator . If no su ch agreement is in force , the text No access will be displayed a nd you must select an other network. The
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 81 Menu functions phone will stay in manual mode until the automatic mode i s selected or another SIM card is in serted into the phone. Display contrast (Menu 4 -2-5) Y ou can adjust the display contrast with this menu. There are ten (1 0) possible contrast levels. 1. Select Displa y cont rast under Ph one sett ings . 2. Adjust the displa y contrast by scrolling with or . The contrast bar on the ph one â s display indicates the actual display contrast. Confirm SIM service actions (Menu 4-2-6) Within this men u you can set the phone to s how you the confirmation messages sen t between your phone and the network w hen you are using the SIM services by sel ecting the option Asked . See â SIM services (Menu 14 ) â on page 1 19. Key lock settings (Menu 4-3) When the keypad is lock ed, appears at the top of the display . Note: When the Keypad lock is on, calls may be possible to the e mergency number programmed into your phone, (e.g. 1 12 or other official number ). Automati c keylock (M enu 4-3-1) The automatic keypad lock is a user selectable feature. It functions in principle like a screen saver on your PC. Y ou can set time delay and when that time is up the keypad is locked automatically preventing accidental keypresses.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 82 1. Select On if you want to select the automatic keypad lock. 2. Give the time entry in minutes and seconds after De lay time appears on th e display . The def ault is 01:00. The ma ximum ti me entry fo r the dela y is 60 min utes an d the mini mum entry 10 s e c o n d s . The automatic keyguard activates if: ⢠phone is in standby mode and a user selectable time delay expires. Keylo ck code (Menu 4-3-2) Y ou can use keylock code to prevent the unauthorised use of your phone. The default code is 0000. Note: Before activating the keylock code make sure that the PIN code request is als o set on. If you set the keylock code by pressing On this is confirmed with the note K eylock code activated . Y ou need to e nter the required code in the standby mode to u nlock the keypad. Note: To unlock your keypad, press in standby mode Unlo ck and then key in the four-digit keylock code. If you enter an incorrect keylock code five times in succession, the ph one prompts you to en ter the PIN code instead. After entering the PIN code, you can cha nge your keylock code (Menu 4-3-3). Change keylo ck code ( Menu 4-3-3) If you want to change the old or default code to a new one, use this submenu. 1. Enter the new four-digit keylock code and press OK . 2. V erify the given code. Note: Despite the keylock code you ca n answer a call and use other keys as usual during the call. The keypad lock is reactivated once the call is finished.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 83 Menu functions If you want to take the default code into use again, you must select R estore factory sett ings (Menu 4- 6). Commun icati on sett ings (Menu 4-4) Info s ervic e (M enu 4- 4-1) This network service allows you to receive messages on various topics (such as weather or traffic conditions) from your service provider . For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact you r service provider . By setting this menu to On , you will receive messages on th e active topics. Y ou can edit the list of topics, and mark a topic active or inactive. To pic inde x retrieves a list of available topics from the network. By selecting Top ic s , you can add a topic into the topics list. Key in the topic number and name. Y ou can also edit or erase the topic list. Select La nguag e to set the language f or the messages. Only messa ges in the selected language ar e show n. Tip: Y ou can save info service messages in the Archive folder or in one of the user-specif ied folders. Listen to voice messages (Menu 4- 4-2) When you enter this submenu, the phone automatically calls your voice mailbox at the phone number stored in Menu 4-4-3. Note that the voice mailbox is a network service an d you may need to subscribe to it first. When the display text abov e the left selection key is OK , press the key t o call your voice mailbox number.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 84 Tip: To quickly call your voice mailbox, press and h old when in the standby mode or in menus. V oice mailbox num ber (Menu 4-4-3) Within this submenu, you can stor e and edit your voice mailbox number . V oice mailbox is a network service. For more information and for the voice mailbox number , contact your service provider . Ser vice comma nd edit or ( Menu 4 -4-4 ) From this submenu you can send service requests (als o known as USSD commands ), for example activation of network services commands, to your service provider . For more information, contact your service provider . Securi ty settings (Menu 4-5 ) Y our phone is equipped with a versatile security sys tem to prevent unauthorised use of the phone or the SIM card. See also â Access codes â on page 122. PIN co de r eques t ( Men u 4- 5-1) Y ou can protect your SI M card by setting the phone to ask for your PIN code every time the phone is switched on. To do this, you need to set the me nu PIN c ode reques t to On . You will need the PIN code to turn this request function on. The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM card. I f not, contact your service provider . Y ou can change your PIN code in the Change of access codes m enu (4-5-6). Note: If you enter an incorrect PIN code th ree times in succession, the SIM card is blocked and you need to enter the PUK code to unblock the SIM card. See â Access codes â on page 122. Note: Some SI M cards do not allow th e PIN code request to b e turned off.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 85 Menu functions Call bar ring service (Menu 4-5-2) This network service allows you to restrict incoming calls to and outgoing calls from your phone. A barring password is required for using this function. Y ou can select on e of the following call restrictions: ⢠Outgoing calls to bar a ll outgoing calls. ⢠International calls to bar all calls to abroad when in the h ome country . ⢠International calls except to home co untry to bar all international calls except to calls to th e home country when a broad. ⢠Incoming calls to bar all incoming calls. ⢠Incoming calls when abr o ad to bar all incoming calls when abroad. For each of th e above settings you can select Activate , Cance l or Check status (to show barred call types). Within the submenu Cancel all barrings you can cancel a ll call restrictions. Note : When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain emerge ncy numbers in some networks (e.g. 1 12 or other offi cial emergency number) . Fixed diall ing (Me nu 4-5- 3) This service restricts your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers, if th is function is supported by your SIM card. To save and edit the numbers on the list, you will need to h ave the PIN2 code. Note : When Fixed Dial Option is se t on, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks (e.g. 1 12 or other official emergency number).
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 86 Closed user group ( Menu 4-5-4) This network service specifies the group of people whom you can call a nd who can call you. Pr eset resets the phone to use a user group the SIM card owner has agreed upon with the service provider . A closed user g roup is indicated by the icon . For further in formation contact your networ k operator or service provider . Note: When calls are limited to Closed User G roups, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in some networks ( e.g. 1 1 2 or other official emergency number). Security level (Menu 4-5 -5) Y ou can protect your phone again st unauthorised use with the security code (security code). To do this, you need to set the menu function Security level to Phone or Memory . When set to Phon e , the phone will ask for the security code when the SIM card inserted is not one of the five SIM cards used most recently with the phone. When set to Memor y , the security code is required to enter the phone â s internal phone book.The security code is also required for using some functions, for example, to clear a phone book or to restore the factory settings.The security code is usually supplied with the phone (on an identification sticker). If not, contact your local dealer. The factory setting for the security code is 12345. Chan ge the code w ithin t he men u 4-5 -6 Change of ac cess co des . Keep the new code secret and in a safe place which is separate from the phone. Note: If you enter an incorrect security code five times in succession, the phone is blocked and will not accept the correct security code for the next five minutes. Tip: You can also restrict calls made from or to your phone if supported by your network. See also Call barring service (4-5 -2), Fi xed dial ling ( 4-5-3 ) a nd Closed u ser gr oup (4-5 -4) in the Settings section
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 87 Menu functions Note : When you change the security level, all the recent calls lists a re cleared. Change o f access codes ( Menu 4-5-6) With this menu you can change the access codes: security code, PIN code, PIN2 code and barring password. These codes can on ly include the characters 0 to 9. The phone pr ompts you to enter the current code and th e new code. It also prompts you to verify the new code by entering it again. Note : Avoid using a ccess codes similar to the emergency numbers, such as 1 12, to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number . Rest ore fa ctory settin gs (Me nu 4-6 ) Y ou can reset some of the menu settings to their original values. The security code is n eeded for this function. â Call divert (Menu 5) This network service allows you to direct your incoming ca lls to another number (for example, to your voice mailbox number). For details, contact your service provider . Within the Menu 5 you can select one of the following diverts: ⢠Divert al l voice calls. All voice calls are diverted and no ringing tone is played at an incoming call. ⢠Divert if busy . Voice calls are diverted when your number is busy . Tip: If Di vert if busy is activated, rejecting an incoming call will also divert the call.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 88 ⢠Diver t if not answer ed . V oice calls are diverted when you don â t answer a call w ithin the pre-set timeout. ⢠Divert if out of r each . V oice calls are diverted when your phone is switched off or outside of the network service area. ⢠Divert if not available . Voice calls are diverted when your number is busy , when you don â t answer a call, and when your phone is switched off or outside of the n etwork service area. ⢠Divert all fax calls . All fax calls are diverted. ⢠Divert all data calls . All data calls are diverted. Select the option Activate to set the divert setting on if allowed by the network, Ca ncel to set the divert setting off or Check status to check whet her the divert is activated or not. To cancel all diverts, select the submen u Cancel all diverts . Tip: The icon is shown in the standby mode when you have activated the Divert a ll voice call s . If you have two phone lines, the divert icon for your first line is and f or the second line is . â Games (Menu 6) Y our phone offers you three games to play : Snake II , Op posite and Pa i rs I I . Setti ngs allow you to set the lights and sounds on or off for a game. Note: Y our phone must be switched on to use this f unction. Do not switch on the phone when the use of a wireless phone is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 89 Menu functions To s ta r t a n ew ga m e 1. Press Menu , scroll to Game s and pr ess Select . 2. In Pa i r s I I , s elect first either Time trial or Puzzle and then the option New gam e . In Oppo site , select the op tion New g ame and in Snake I I sel ect th e 1 play er option. T o star t a 2-p layer game Y ou can also play Snake II as a 2-player game via the IR port of your phone with a person who has the same game on a compatible phone. Bef ore starting the 2-player game, ensure that the IR ports of th e two phones are pointing at each other . See â Infrared ( Menu 12) â on page 10 9. To start the game both play ers should select the option 2 players . Game op tions ⢠New game starts a new game session. ⢠Level allows you to set the le vel of difficulty for th e selected game. Select the desired le vel with or and press OK . ⢠Inst ructi ons shows a help text on how to play the game. Scr oll through the text with or . ⢠Top sc o re shows the highest score (in Snake II an d Pai rs II only). ⢠Continue allows you to resume a paused game. ⢠Last v iew shows the final view of th e game immediately after the game has ended.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 90 â Calculator (Menu 7) The calculator in your phone adds, su btracts, multiplies, divides, and converts currency values. This calculator has a limited accuracy and rounding errors may occur , especially in long divisions. Note: Y our phone must be switched on to u se this function. Do not switch on the ph one when the use of a wireless phone is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . Using the ca lculator 1. Pre ss Menu , scroll to Calcu lator , and press Select . 2. Whe n â 0â is displayed on the scr een, enter the first number in the calculation. To change the sign, press Options , scroll to Change sign and press Select . To a dd a decimal, press . 3. To add, press once ( will appear). To s ubtract, press twice (- will appear) . To multiply , press three tim es (* will appear). To divide, pr ess four times (/ will appear). Alternatively , press Options , scroll to the desired option s, and press Select . 4. Enter the second numb er . R epeat these st eps as many tim es as neces sary . Pr ess Clear to erase any mista kes. 5. For a total, pr ess Options . Scroll to Equals and press Select . 6. To star t a new calculation, first press an d hold Clear .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 91 Menu functions Currency conve rsion After setting the exchange rate in the C alculator you can convert currencies with your phone either in Cal culator or in standby mode. In standby mode, en ter digits and select Options and then either In domes tic or In foreign depending on which value you r equire. Note: In standby m ode you find the decimal point under , if needed. Y ou can also use the asterisk (*) which functions like a decimal point. When you key in a n umber in the standby mode you can create a call with the number or by pressing Options you get the followin g selection list: Save Add to name 1 Send message Call In dome stic In foreign Settin g the exc hange rate in Calcula tor 1. Select Cal culat or . 2. Press Options a nd choose Exchange rate . 3. Select either Foreign unit exp r essed in domestic units or Domestic units expressed in foreign units . 1. This item shows only if the phone â s intern al memory is being used.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 92 4. Set the requir ed exchange rate. The currency exchange rate is stored permanently in ph one â s memory . â Calendar (Me nu 8) The calendar helps you to keep track of reminders, calls that you need to make, meetings, and birthdays. T he phone sounds an alarm tone w hen the set date for a meeting, birthday or a call is reached. Note: Y our phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not swi tch on the phone when the use of a wireless phone is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . Cale ndar vi ews Day view The day view shows the date and the icon(s) for each note type you have set for the day . Se e â Adding a calendar note â on page 93. To access the day view , press Menu , scroll to Calendar and pr ess Select . Note view The note vie w allows you to view th e details of the selected note. To access the note view: When in the day view , pres s Options , scroll to View day notes and press Select . Week list The week li st allows you to scroll th e calendar week by w eeks.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 93 Menu functions To access the week list : 1. When in a day view , press Options . 2. Scroll to View by weeks and press Select . Options list of calendar views The option list of calendar views includes options for making a note and for sending a note via the text message service or via IR. The option list for day view and note view also includes options f or erasing, editing, repeating and moving a note. For notes of type Meetin g , Call and Memo , there is also an option for copyin g the note to another day and for repeating th e note (every day , every week, biw eekly or every year ). The Settings option allows you to set the date, time, date format, time format and week format for the calendar . The option Auto erase allows you to set the phone to delete old notes a utomatically after a specified time. However , the repeat notes (for example, birthday notes) will not be deleted. Adding a calend ar note 1. Once in t he Calendar menu, scroll with or to th e desired date. 2. Press Options , scr oll to Make a note and press Select . 3. Scroll to one of the f ollowing note types and press Sel ect . For enterin g letters and numb ers, see â Storing names and numbersâ on page 4 1. ⢠Me eting () Enter the note an d press OK . Th en enter the time and pr ess OK . ⢠Call ()
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 94 Enter the desired phone n umber (or search for it from the ph one book) and press OK . Then e nter the desired name (or s earch for it from the phone book) a nd press OK . Repeat this with the tim e. ⢠Birt hday () Enter the person â s na me and press OK , then repeat the same with the date of birth a nd year of birth (optional). If you en ter the year of birth, th e note shows th e person â s age after the name . ⢠Memo () Enter the note a nd press OK . 4. Scroll with or to the desired alarm option (except fot the Memo ) and press Select . The pre sence of a tone alert is indicated by w hen you view th e notes. Tip: When you are in the day view or week list, you can quickly go to today â s view by pressing . When the phone alarms for a note The phone flashes its lights, beeps, and displays the note. With a Call note on the display , you can call the displayed number by pressing . To stop the alarm and view the note, press View , to stop the alarm without viewing the note, press Exit . â Task journal (Menu 9) The Task journ al is like a timecard used for keeping track of working times and costs, and also for storing various comments. The Task journal uses time and date formats of Cal endar (see page 92) and Real-time clock (see page 10 3). Note: You ca n send T ask journal data to another phone as a text message or transfer data to a compatible PC via a cable or using infrared function.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 95 Menu functions Note: Y our phone must be switched on to u se this function. Do not switch on the ph one when the use of a wireless phone is prohibited or when it m ay cause interference or danger . After selecting Task journal (Menu 9) you have the following option s: ⢠Restart , Add new , Find , Edit , Eras e and Hi stor y If the Task list is empty , the only option to view and to select is Add new . Note: If th e phone is switched off during an active task, the task is not stopped; task journal timer continues to run in the background. Also, if the phone is powered off due to a low battery , the task journal timer continues to r un as long as there is enough power to keep the phone â s main clock running. Restart ( Menu 9-1) With this submenu you can restart the existing task. If the Ta sk list is empty this option is not available. ⢠Select Re start , scroll to the desired task a nd press Start . The task is started and a new entry is cr eated. The Active work view is displayed. Add new (Menu 9-2) This submenu allows you to add a task to the T ask journal. 1. Key in the name or other identification dat a after Title : and Custome r: Maximum length of an entry is 20 characters. 2. Confirm the given entries with OK . The first ent ry of the new task is started and the phone moves t o the active work view .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 96 Note: If there is no free sp ace in the memory , Memory full. Erase old task? is displayed. Find (Menu 9-3) With this submenu you can search for previous ta sks by title, by customer . If you select By title , you need to enter the na me or a part of it for the search operation. O r you can press OK to get the list of tasks. The first matching item is h ighlighted. If there are no matches, the list starts with the closest match. ⢠If the search is done By tit le the remaining tasks appear in alph abetical order below the f irst one. ⢠If the search is done By cu stome r only the tas ks of a particular name a re shown. Edit (Menu 9-4) With this submenu you can edit both the title an d customer name of a particular task. After you have chosen this submenu the phone dis plays the Task list, and you can select the item you wish to edit. Erase (Menu 9-5 ) Ther e are tw o diffe rent way s to era se a task : ⢠One by one deletes one item at the time from the T ask list. ⢠All tasks dele tes all the existing tasks at once. Both deletions must be verified with OK .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 97 Menu functions History (Men u 9-6) Within this function you can view th e history of tasks. 1. Select History from the Task journal main menu. 2. Select from the T ask list the task you wish to examine. After a particular task is selected, the phone turns to a History view . The History view contains the following data: ⢠Title of a particular job or task ⢠Customer name ⢠Created ⢠Entries ⢠Total time ⢠Tot a l w a ge s ⢠Tot a l m at e ri al s ⢠Tot a l c os t s ⢠Comments If you need more detailed inform ation or if you want to send data to another phone, or erase something, press Options in this view .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 98 Detai ls This view shows each entry of a particular item in chronological order . The date of entry , the number of the current entry and the tota l number of entries are shown at the top of the display . Other information includes: ⢠Tas k ti me ⢠Wages ⢠Materials ⢠Costs Y ou see the next entry for the current item if scrolling with or . More detailed information on tas ks can b e found, if you pre ss Op ti ons . Time table Y ou see the working times in detail by selecting Timetab le . Started Pa us ed and / or Started Stop ped View w ages Y ou see the wages in detail by s electing View wages . The phone displays the following information: Hour s Rate
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 99 Menu functions Tot al View m ateri als Y ou see the costs of used m aterials in detail by selecting View materials . The followin g view with the entered information appears: Amount Cost Tot al Each of these views contains information about one entry only . View comments Y ou can read any comments written for the curren t entry . If you select Options you can edit given comments, send them to another phone as a text message . Send a s SMS With this option you can send h istory data from the Task journal to another phone as a text message. The content of data depends on where in the Task journal the sending option was selected. Tr ansfer ring T a sk j ournal dat a to a PC using a c able If you use a cable for transferring T ask journal data: ⢠Connect the DLR-3P cable to the serial port on the back of a compatible PC. ⢠Connect the DL R-3P cable to your phon e. Start using the T ask journal PC-connectivity pr ogram available through the Nokia website (www .nokia.com).
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 100 Note: Making or answering phone calls du ring a PC connection is not recommended as it might disrupt the operation. Tra nsferring Task journa l data to a co mpatibl e PC via in frared You can also transfer Ta sk journal data from your phone to a compatible PC via in frared function with the help of the T ask journal PC-connectivity program which is available through the Nokia website (www .n okia.com). However , it is not possible t o receive Task journal data through the infrared. See â Infr ared (Me nu 12) â on page 109 for more information. Active work vie w Active work view is shown wh en a task is active in the Task journal. Likewise, th e timing starts in this view . The active work view contains t he following information: ⢠title of your task ⢠starting time of th e current entry ⢠duration of the current entry ⢠total work time If you select Opti on s you can pause or stop the task, add cost or comment, find another t ask or view the history of a task. Pa u s e t a s k When the task is stopped by using Pa u s e you can resume it later . The text Pa u s e d blinks on th e display and the timer stops, bu t it is not cleared. To carry on with the same task, Select Options and th en Continue .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 101 Menu functions After pausing the task you can also s top the task, add cost information or a comment to it or view its histo ry . Stop task 1. Press Stop if you w ish to end the task. 2. Conf irm with OK . This stops the timer and ends the current entry . The task is saved. The summary of this entry is displayed: ⢠Dur atio n ⢠Wag es ⢠Materia ls ⢠Comments If you select Options you can still add cost or a comment, restart the task or send the data to another phone. If any information is added to the entry , the phone returns to th e updated summary view afte rwa rds. Add cost Y ou can als o enter cost information in the active work view . The maximum entry is 9 digits with two decimals. 1. Select Wag es and the text Hou rly w age: appears. 2. Key in the wage. 3. Confirm the value with OK . The entered data can be viewed on th e display:
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 102 ⢠Hours for showing the duration of the cu rrent entry up to that specific moment ⢠Rate for showing the hourly wage ⢠Tot a l for showing the current summary of wages By selecting Material you ca n add material costs to total costs. 1. Enter a name or other identification of the par t in question after Ma terial id: and press OK . 2. Give the amount of used parts. 3. Key in the price of one piece after Price: and press OK . The following in formation is displayed: ⢠Amount ⢠Cost ⢠Tot a l for showing the summary of costs in the current addition Add comment Y ou can store comments or make n otes by selecting Add comment . The length of the comment is limited to 40 char acters. Press Clear if you want to delete the written text. Press Save i f y o u w an t t o ke ep th e te x t .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 103 Menu functions â Clock (Menu 1 0) Stopwa tch (Menu 1 0-1) Note: Y our phone must be switched on to use this f unction. Do not switch on the phone when the us e of a wir eless phone is prohibited or w hen it may cause interference or danger . Y ou can m easure time with your phone using the stopwatch. With the stopwatch it is possible to measure time, take intermediate times or lap times. If you press during the stopwatch timing, you r phone returns to the standby mode and the timing moves to the bac kground. Y ou can use the phone as usual. The timing is also moved fr om the display to the b ackground if there is: ⢠incoming call ⢠battery low note ⢠recharge battery note ⢠other types of special m essages Note: Using the stopwatch consumes the battery and the phone âÂÂs operating time will be reduced. Therefore, to maximize the operating time of your phone, it is recommended not to let it run in the background (i.e. whe n performing other oper ations with your phone) when you don â t need it.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 104 Spli t timing Y ou can start meas uring time by selecting Menu - Clo ck- Stopwatch - Split timing . The phone displays an initial state, and the initial value is shown in big digital n umbers 00:00: 00:0. 1. Pre ss Start and the clock starts running. 2. Pre ss Stop when you wa nt to finis h. When timing is stopped, th e result is shown on the display . Note: If timing excee ds the value of 99:59:59:9, the tim e on the display changes to 00:00:00:0 and the clock keeps running. By pre ssing Options you can restart, save, reset and e xit the timing function. If you start th e timing anew by pressing Start , time keeps running cumulatively instead of restarting at z ero. If you select Exit , the phone returns to the stan dby mode. If the stopwatch was not reset, there is a n active item Show last on the selection list. Interm ediate times 1. Pre ss Start . 2. Pre ss Split when you want to see an intermedi ate time. Time keeps running as usu al but also the newest intermediate time is displayed under the running time. Intermediate times are shown in smaller font than the run ning time. Three intermediate times can be view ed si mult aneo usly w ith the runni ng ti me. If th ere a re mor e of th em, y ou ca n v iew t hem b y scrolling with or . Timing stops when you press Stop .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 105 Menu functions Lap timing This function is s tarted by selecting Lap timing from th e Stopwatch main menu. 1. Press Start and he c lock s tart s ru nning. 2. Press Lap when you want to see the lap time. By pressing Lap , timing stops and then restarts immediately at zero. T he newest lap time is displayed under the running time. Three lap times can be viewed simultaneously with r unning time on the phone â s display . Scroll with or to view any furth er lap tim es. When you press Stop timing stops and the total time is shown as a resu lt. Note: If you s elect Split timing or Lap timing from the Options list while there is timing going on in the background, the confirmation note Disconti nue previou s? appears. Saving o r resetti ng time s 1. Press Options a nd then select Save from th e list. 2. Key in the name for the tim e value after Name: The max imum numbe r of charact ers is 1 0. 3. Confirm the given name with OK . To reset the tim es: After selecting Reset f rom the list of options, confirm the resetting with OK . The phone returns to th e initial state where the initial value 00:00 :00:0 is shown. Viewing times Y ou can see s aved times by selecting View times . The nam ed time sets are listed on the d isplay .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 106 If you select a particular time set, you can view its times. Intermediate and lap times ar e displayed in a smaller font underneath the final tim e. Scroll with or to view any further times. In this view , you can erase times by selecting Options and then Erase t ime s . Dele ting times Y ou can delete times from the stopwatch memory by selecting Erase tim es from the Stopwatch main menu. It is also possible to erase times by selecting this function u nder Options . Y ou can erase times one by one or all times at once. In either way the phone still prompts you to confirm the deletion with OK . Note: If you try to erase a time when there are no more tim e sets, the phone displays the note Stopwatch memory empty . Stopwatch memory The memory reserved for stopwatch tim es is limited. The maximum number of st opwatch times is 250. The stopwatch memory stor es its content also when the phone â s power is switched off. Alarm clo ck (Menu 10-2) Y ou can set the phone to alarm at a specified time within the Alarm cl ock m e n u ( M e n u 1 0 - 2 ). T o access this submen u, press Men u , then select firs t Clock , then Alarm c lock and press Select . The alarm clock uses the time format set for the clock: i .e.12-hour or 24 -hour format. In the stan dby mode, the indicator in the header line shows th at the alarm is set to On . Y ou can switch the phone off and the alarm clock w ill still work.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 107 Menu functions When the alarm expires : The phone wi ll sound an alert tone. W hen the phone is alerting, Alarm! is also shown and the phone â s lights flash. Press Sto p to stop the alarm. If you let the phone alarm for a m inute or press Snooze , the alarm stops for a few minutes an d then resumes. Note: If the alarm tim e expires while the phone is switched off, the phone starts alarming. If you press Stop , the phone asks if you want to activat e the phone for calls. Press Ye s to register or No to keep the phone switched off. Note: Do not switch on the phone when the u se of a wireless phone is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . Time s etting s (Menu 1 0-3) The phone is provided with a clock. The current time is shown on the display if you have selected Show clock option. The clock wi ll not show if you are in the phone book or in menu functions. Note: Y our phone must be switched on to u se this function. Do not switch on the ph one when the use of a wireless phone is prohibited or when it m ay cause interference or danger . Show clock / Hide cloc k (Menu 1 0-3-1) With this menu you can either show or hide the clock. Set th e time (Men u 1 0-3-2) 1. Once in Menu 1 0- 3-2, pre ss Select . 2. Enter the pr esent time and press OK .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 108 Time format (Menu 1 0-3-3) This submenu allows you to select the 12-hour or 24-hour time f ormat. Scroll to either format and press OK . The clock also serves the following functions: Messages (Me nu 1), Call r egister (Menu 2), Alarm clock (Menu 1 0-2), Calendar (Men u 8) a nd Task journal (Men u 9). Note: If the battery is removed from the phone for a long time, you may need to set the time again. â Sound meter (Menu 1 1) The Sound meter is not in tended for professional use. It is rather a f un feature providing you with the mean s to measure the estimated noise le vel of your surroundings. Note: Y our phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not swi tch on the phone when the use of a wireless phone is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . The phone displays a vertical m eter bar that shows the n oise level graphically . There is also a numerical presentation of the sound level. The peak value is shown in a frame on the top and the current value is presented underneath. The unit of these numerical va lues is the decibel (dB). Note: It is not possible to me asure the estimated noise level of a call in progress. Please note that the Sound meter in your phone is NOT a professional precision instrument. It can only display an approximation of the real dB level. The Sound meter of your phone measures the sound leve l in frequencies between 300Hz and 3400Hz, meaning approximately the f requencies that are most important f or the speech intelligibility and are
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 109 Menu functions conveyed through the GSM system in a normal call. Noise beneath and above those frequencies will not be meas ured. When you p ress Options you get a list of three: ⢠Reset ⢠Hold ⢠Dynamic With Reset you can reset the peak valu e. With Hold both values are shown but the peak value is updated only when the current n oise level is greater than th e current peak va lue. With Dynamic both values are shown bu t the peak value is valid only for 5 seconds. Note: Using the sound meter consumes the battery and the phone â s operating time will be reduced considerably . It is recommended n ot to use the sound meter when n ot needed. â Infrared (Menu 12) In this menu you ca n set up your phone to r eceive data through its infrared (IR) port. To u se an IR connection, the device with which you want to establish a connection must be IrDA compliant. You can send or receive data such as business cards (names and numbers stored in the phone book) an d calendar notes to or from a compatible phone or data device (for example, a computer) via the IR port of your phone. Y ou can sen d Task journal da ta via the IR port to a com patible PC with the help of the Task journal PC- connectivity program which is available through the Nokia website (www .nokia.com). It is not possible
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 110 to send Tas k journal data to anoth er phone via infrared, though. Y ou can not receive T ask journal data from a PC. Note: Y our phone must be switched on to use this function. Do not swi tch on the phone when the use of a wireless phone is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger . To se nd and r eceive data v ia IR 1. Ensure that the IR ports of the sending and receiving devices are poi nting at each other and that there are no obstructions between the devices. The preferable distance between the two devices in an infrared connection is one meter at most. 2. When receiving data via IR, activate the IR port of your phone by entering the Inf rared menu (Menu 12). 3. The user of the sending phone selects the desired IR function to start data transfer . If data transfer is not star ted within two minutes of a ctivation of the IR port, the connection is cancelled and has to be started again. Note: Your phone is a Class 1 Laser Product. Chec king the stat us of an IR con nection The status of an IR connection is indicated by . When is shown continuously , the IR connection is activated and you r phone is ready to s end and receive data via its IR port. When is not shown, no IR connection exists. When blinks, your phone is trying to connect to th e other device or a con nection has been lost.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 111 Menu functions â Mobile Internet Services (WAP) Var ious WAP (Wireless Application Pr otocol) service providers on the Internet maintain web pages specifically designed for mobile phones, offering services such as ba nking, news, weather reports, flight times, etc. Note: Check the availability of W ML- based services, pricing and tarifs w ith your network operator and/or the W AP service provider . Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. These web pages use a M ark-Up language called WML (Wireless Mark-Up Language). W eb pages using the Mark-Up language HTML (Hyper Text Mark-Up language) cannot be view ed on your phone. Note: Y our phone must be switched on to use this f unction. Do not switch on the phone when the us e of a wir eless phone is prohibited or w hen it may cause interference or danger . Y ou can access WA P services via the Services menu (Menu 13 ) after y ou have stored t he sett ings required to access a service. Setti ng up the phone for the W AP services Before you can access WAP services you need to store the required con nection settings of a WAP service, from which you can visit the WAP pages they offer . Y ou get the connection settin gs from WAP service providers. They m ay send you the settings as a text message or you should key in th e settings manually . Y ou can stor e the connection settings under one of the five sets in your phone. Each connection set contains the required settings for one WAP service and you need to store the settin gs for each W AP service only once.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 112 Saving the settings received a s a text message When you receive the connection settings as a text message, you will see the message Service settings rece iv ed on your display . ⢠To store the received settings, press Options , and scroll to Save . ⢠If you want to view th e settings first, press Options , and scroll to View . Th e name a nd the homepage address of the received setting are displayed. Press Save to st ore the settings or Back to return to the option li st. Keying in the settings manually Note: You get the settings from W AP service providers. They will give you more specific in formation. 1. Pre ss Menu ; scroll to Services and press Select . 2. Scroll to Sett ings and press Select . 3. Pre ss Select when Connection settings is displayed. 4. Scroll to a connection set and press Options . 5. Scroll to Edit and press Select . The settings are: ⢠Hom epage - write the homepage address of the connection set ⢠Connection type - select Continuous or T emp orary ⢠Connection security - select On or Off . Note: When the connection security is on, the phone tries to u se a secure line when a service is activated. If a secure line is not available, the connection will not be made. If you wish to connect anyway , with a n on-secure connection, you must set the connection security to Off .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 113 Menu functions ⢠Bearer - select SMS or Data . The speed and cost differs according to the bearer you select. For pricing and more in formation, contact the WA P service provider . Ke y in the settings listed below as instructed by the service provider . SMS se lected a s the be arer Server number Service number Data se lected a s the bearer Dial-up number IP addres s Authentica tion type - sel ect Secure or Normal Data ca ll type - select Analogue or ISDN . You can select a fixed data call type which also effects the data call speed. When ISDN is selected, the data call speed in cludes only the options 9600 and 14 400 bps. Data call speed - Automa tic selects the data call speed automatically but th is is not possible if ISDN has been selected as the data call type. The speed of the data call depends on the service provider . User name Pa s s w o r d Editin g th e settin gs There is space for five connection sets in your phone. T o add a new set you have to ov erwrite an existing stored set if the five sets are already being ut ilized. By selecting the optio n Rename , you can rename the connection set.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 114 Y ou can choose whether images ar e shown or not and how the text is shown on the display when you are browsing a W A P page. In some ca ses WML pages may have text wrapping set to off (that is , lines are cut when there is no more space on the line ) as a default; select On to see the whole text. 1. Pre ss Menu , scroll to the Services and press Select . 2. Scroll to Sett ings and press Select . 3. Scroll to A ppearance set ting s and press Select . 4. Scroll to Text wrapping or Show images and press Sele ct . 5. Select On or Off fo r Text wrapping and Ye s or No for Show images . Accessing W AP pages Once you have stored all the required con nection settings you can access W AP pages. There are three different ways of accessing W AP pages: ⢠Opening a homepage (by sele cting Hom e in the options of the Services menu) ⢠Selecting a bookmark (by selecting Bookmarks in the option s of the Services menu) ⢠Entering the address of a WAP page ( by selecting Go to address in the options of the Services menu ) First, you need to activate the connection set of the WAP service you want to use. Only on e set can be activated at a tim e. Activat ing a connectio n set 1. Pre ss Menu , scroll to Services and press Select . 2. Scroll to Sett ings and press Select .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 115 Menu functions 3. Press Select when Co nnection settings is displayed. 4. Scroll to the desired connection set and press Options . Then scroll to Activa te and press Select . Accessin g a WA P page by openin g the homepage 1. When you are in the standby mode, press Menu , scroll to Services and press Select . 2. T o connect to the homepage of the serv ice, press Select when Home is highlighted. Boo kmar ks Y ou can save the addresses of up to 1 5 of your favourite or m ost frequently used WAP pages in the phone â s memor y . Adding book marks 1. Press Menu , scroll to Services and press Select . 2. Scroll to Bookma rks and press Select 3. Press Options , then press Select when Add bookmar k is highlighted. 4. Enter the address of the desired service and press OK . Then enter a title for the s ervice and press OK Tip: Y ou can also add a bookmark while browsing. First press Option s and s croll to Bookmarks and press Select . Then pr ess Options and select Save book mark and press Sel ect . Acce ssing a WAP page by us ing the bookma rks 1. Press Menu , scroll to Services and press Select . 2. Scroll to Bookma rks and press Select . 3. Scroll to the desired b ookmark and press Options . To connect to t he service, scroll to Go t o and press Select .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 116 Note: A bookmark may become associated with the connection setting that you used when it was first added. If the bookmark does not work (the text Check service settings may be displayed), you may need to activate another connection set. Accessing a WAP pag e by entering its a ddress 1. Pre ss Menu , scroll to Services and press Select . 2. Scroll to Go to address and press Select . 3. Key in the address (u se the key to enter special characters) of the W AP page you want to visit and press OK . Note : It is not necessary to enter the prefix http://; it will be added autom atically . If you are using a protocol other than http (s uch as ftp), you will have to enter the prefix. Viewing W AP pages When you are con nected to the homepage of a WAP service, follow the tex t guides on the ph one â s display . Keys used in WAP naviga tion ⢠Press , e.g. to select a link. ⢠Use the scroll keys and to view a W AP page. ⢠Press to disconnect from a W AP page and to quit br owsing. ⢠Press the keys - to enter letters and numbers and the key to enter special characters. ⢠Press the right selection key e.g. to go back to the previously accessed WAP pa ge. ⢠Press the left selection key e.g. to display the list of options.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 117 Menu functions While you are browsing a s ervice, pressing Options displays the currently a vailable option list. Scroll to the desir ed option and press Sele ct . Here are some of the possible options which may become available while browsing: Home (to go to the homepage), Relo ad (to reload the page), Sele ct (to select a link), Back (to go back to the previously accessed WAP page), Appear ance se ttings (to set the settings for the text and images), Bookmarks (to add a bookmark), Use number (to extract numbers from the se rvice you are using or from the page that is displayed), Go t o ad dress (to enter the address of the WAP page you wish to access), Clear the cache (to clear the cache memory of the phone), Security info (to see whether the con nection is secured or not) and Exit (to quit browsing). Emptyi ng the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the phone. A cache is a buffer memory that is used to store data temporarily . Note : If you have tried to access or have acc essed confidential information requiring passwords (for example, your ban k account), empty the cache of your phone prior to each use to secure the con fidentiality 1. Press Menu , scroll to Services and press Select . 2. To empty the cache memory of your phone, scroll to Clear the c ache and press Select .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 118 Security certificate s For using some services, you need a security certificate. A security certificate is used to enable secure communications with a WAP gateway or a server . The certificates are used to check signatures of WAP gateway or server certificates an d can be downloaded during browsing. Y ou can only be sure of the correct identity of a WAP gateway or a server wh en the signature and the period of validity of a W AP gateway or a server certificate have been checked.Y ou will be notified on the phone â s display if the identity of the WAP server or gateway cannot be verified, the WAP server or gateway is not authentic or if you do not ha ve the right security certificate in your phone. After you have downloaded the required security certificate from the Internet, you can v iew the certificate and then save or delete it. If you sa ve it, the certificate is added to th e list of security certificates in the Services menu. To view t he list of security certific ates: 1. Pre ss Menu , scroll to the Services menu and press Select . 2. Scroll to Sett ings and press Select . 3. Scroll to Security certifica te and Select . Note: When the secu rity icon is displayed, the data tr ansmission between the phone and the WAP gateway or a server (identified by the IP ad dress in the Connection settings ) is encrypted and secure. However , the security icon does not indica te that the data transm ission between the gateway and the content server (place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. I t is up to the ser vice provider to secure the data tr ansmission between the gateway and the content server .
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Menu functions 119 Menu functions â SIM services (Menu 14) In addition to the functions a vailable in the phone, your SIM card may provide additional s ervices that you can a ccess via the menu 14. Menu 14 is shown only if it is supported by your SIM card. T he name and contents of the m enu depend entirely on the services available. For availability , rates and in formation on using the SIM s ervices, contact your SIM car d vendor , e.g. your network operator , service provider or oth er third-party vendor . Y ou can set the phone to show you the confirmation m essages sent between your phone and th e network when you are using th e SIM services by selecting the option Asked with in the me nu 4-2- 6 ( Confirm SIM service actions ). Note: Accessing these services may in volve sending a text message (SMS) or making a phone call for which you may be charged.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Data and fax communications 120 7. Data and fax communicatio ns Y our phone allows you to transfer data to other devices when it is connected to a compatible PC via an IR connection or a serial ca ble. To send and r eceive e-mail a nd faxes, conne ct to computers and access the Internet, you also n eed the appropriate data and fax communications software installed on your computer . You can use the Nokia 6250 with a variety of com mercially available data and fax communications applications. For using your ph one as a modem, you f irst need to install it as a modem. The path to the detailed installation instructions and t he required system files can be found th rough the Nokia website (www .n okia.com). â Connecting your phone to a computer Installing communication s applicatio ns and modem dr ivers 1. Ensure that a data communication application is correctly installed on your PC. For information on how to install an application, please refer to that application â s documentation. 2. Install the necessary driver s on your PC. For instructions, see the Nokia website (www .nokia.com) to find the modem setup application. For troubleshooting, please r efer to the Readme.txt file which can be found on the N okia website. Using communi cations appl ications Do either of the following:
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Data and fax communications 121 Data and fax communications If yo u use IR: ⢠Activate the IR connection of you r phone by selecting Men u 12. ⢠Make sure that the infrared port of th e phone faces the infrared port of th e PC. If you us e a cable: ⢠Connect the DLR-3 P cable to the serial port on the back of your PC. ⢠Connect the DL R-3P cable to your phon e. Note: Both the cable a nd the connector must be dry . Start using the dat a communication application on the PC. For information on how to use the application, please refer to that a pplication â s docu mentation. Note: Making or answering phone calls during a PC connection is not r ecommended as it might disrupt the operation. For better performance during data calls, place the phone on a stationary surface with the keypad facing downward. Do not move the phone by holding it in your hand during a data call.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Reference information 122 8. Reference information â Access codes Y ou can use the access codes described in th is section to avoid unauthorised u se of your phone and SIM card. The access codes (except PU K, PUK2 and keylock codes) can be changed by using Menu 4-5-6. See the following section. Security code (5 digits ) The security code can be used to avoid unauthorised use of your phone. The factory setting f or the security code is 12345. T o avoid unauthorised use of your phone, change the code in th e Settings menu, see â Security level (Menu 4-5-5) on page 86 and â Chan ge of access codes (Menu 4-5-6) â on page 87. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separ ate from your phone. PIN code (4 to 8 digits) The PIN (Personal Identification Number) code protects your S IM card against unauthorised use. The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM c ard. When the PIN code request is enabled (Menu 4 -5-1), the code is requested each time th e phone is switched on. PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits) The PIN2 code, supplied with some SIM ca rds, is required to access s ome functions, such as charging unit counters. These functions are only available if supported by your SIM card.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Reference information 123 Reference information PUK code ( 8 digits) The PUK (P ersonal Unblocking Key) code is required to change a blocked PIN code. The PUK code may be supplied with the SIM card. If not, contact your local service provider for the code. If you lose the code, contact your service pr ovider . PUK2 code (8 digit) The PUK2 code, supplied with some SI M cards, is required to change a blo cked PIN2 code. If you lose the code, contact your s ervice provider . Key lock code (4 di git) Y ou can use keylock code (M enu 4-3-2) to pr event the u nauthorised u se of your phon e. The de fault code i s 00 00. Note: Before activating the keylock code make sure that the PIN code request is also set on. Barring pa ssword The barring password is needed when usin g the â Call Bar ring â function. Y ou obtain the password from your service provider . â Battery information Chargin g and discha rging the battery ⢠Never charge the phone when the bottom connector or phone itself is wet or damp. ⢠Do not charge the ph one in wet and damp conditions.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Reference information 124 ⢠Your phone is powered by a rechargeable battery . ⢠Note that a new battery's fu ll performance is achieved only after two or three com plete charge and discharge cycles. ⢠The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the operating time (talk-time and stand-by time) is noticeably shorter than normal, it is time to buy a new battery . ⢠Use only batteries approved by the ph one manufacturer and rech arge your battery only with the chargers approved by the manufacturer . ⢠When a charger is not in use, disconnect it from the power source. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger f or longer than a w eek, since overcharging may shorten its life. If left unused a fully c harged battery will discharge itself over t ime. ⢠Temperature extremes will af fect the ability of your battery to charge: allow it to cool down or warm u p first . ⢠When the battery is running out of power and only few minutes of talk time remain, a warning tone is heard and Battery low is briefly displayed. W hen no more talk time is left, Battery empty is displayed and a warning tone is sounded and the phone switches itself off. Usin g the batt erie s ⢠The battery must be kept dry . ⢠Use the battery only for its intended purpose. ⢠Never use any charger or battery which is dam aged or worn out. ⢠Do not short-circuit the battery . Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, clip or pen) causes direct connection of the and - ter minals of the battery (metal strips on the
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Reference information 125 Reference information back of the battery) for example when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- circuiting the terminals m ay damage the battery or the connecting object. ⢠Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery . Always try to keep th e battery between 15 ú C a nd 25 ú C (59 F and 77 F). A ph one with a hot or cold battery may temporarily not work, even when the battery is fully charged. Li-Ion batteries performance is particularly limited in temperatures below - 0 ú C (32 F). ⢠Do not dispose of batter ies in a fire! Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly . Must not be disposed of in municipal waste!
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Care and maintenance 126 Care and m aintenance Y our phone is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care . The suggestions below will h elp you to fulfill any warranty obligations and to enjoy this product for many years. Whe n using your phone, battery , charger OR any accessory: ⢠Keep it and a ll its parts and a ccessories out of small children's reach. ⢠Try to keep it dry . Prec ipitation, humidity and liquids contain minera ls that will eventually corrode the connectors . ⢠Do not store your phone in dusty , dirty areas as this may cause damage to some parts of the phone. ⢠Do not store it in hot areas. High temperatu res can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store it in cold areas. Whe n the phone warms up (to its normal temperature) , moisture can form inside the phone, which may damage the electronic circuit board. ⢠Do not open the w ater re sistant backc over if th e phone i s wet or d irty . ⢠Do not attempt to open it except as instructed. Non -expert handling of the device may damage it. ⢠Do not intentionally drop, knock or shake it. Rough handling is never recommended or beneficial for your phone â s fu nctionality . ⢠Do not use harsh che micals, clea ning solvents, or strong detergents to clean it. Wipe it w ith a soft cloth slight ly dampened in a mild so ap-and-water solution . ⢠Do not paint it. P aint can clog the device â s moving parts an d prevent proper ope ration. ⢠If the phone, battery , charger or any accessory are not working properly , take them to your nearest qualifie d service facility. The person nel there will assist you, and if necessary , arrange for service.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Important safety information 127 Important safety information Important safety information â Traffic s afety Do not use a hand-held telepho ne while driving a vehicle. If using a hand-held phone park the vehicle before conversing. Always secure the phone in its holde r; do not place the phone on the passenger seat or where it can break loose in a collision or sudden stop. The use of an alert device to operate a vehicle â s lights or horn on public roads is not permitted. Remember road safety always comes first! â Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulatio ns in force in any area a nd always switch off yo ur phone wh enever it is forbidden to use it, or when it may caus e interference or danger. When connecting the phone or any accessory to another device, read its user guide for detailed safety instruction s. Do not connect in compatible products . As with other mobile radio transmitting equipme nt, users are advised that for the satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of pe rsonnel, it is reco mmended that t he equipment sh ould only be use d in the normal operating position (Held to your ear .). Do not point the infrared beam at anyone â s eye or allow it to int erfere with other infrared devices. â Electronic devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio frequency (RF) signals. However , c ertain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless phone.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Important safety information 128 Pa c e m a ke r s Pacemaker manufacture rs recommend th at a minimum separa tion of 20 cm (6 inches) be ma intained betw een a hand-held wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential int erference with the pacemaker . These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless T echnology Research. Pers ons with pacemak er: ⢠Should always keep the ph one more than 20 cm (6 inches) from th eir pacemaker when the phone is switched on; ⢠Should not carry the phone in a breast pocket; ⢠Should use the ear opposite the pacem aker to minimize the potential for interferen ce. ⢠If you have any reason to s uspect tha t interferen ce is taking place, swit ch off your phone immediate ly . Hearing ai ds Some digital wireless phones may interfe re with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult y our service prov ider . Other medical devices Operation of a ny radio transmitting eq uipment, including cellu lar phones, may interfe re with the functiona lity of inadequately protecte d medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the me dical device to determ ine if th ey are ad equately shielde d from ext ernal RF energy or if y ou have any ques tions. Switch off you r phone in health care facilitie s when any regulation s posted in these areas inst ruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment th at could be sensitive to external RF energy . Ve h i c l e s RF signals may affect improperly installed or inade quately shielded e lectronic systems in m otor vehicles (e.g. electronic fue l injection systems, electroni c anti-skid (anti-lock) braking sys tems, electronic speed control sy stems, air bag systems).
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Important safety information 129 Important safety information Check with the manufact urer or its representativ e regarding your vehicle. You should also cons ult the m anufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle. Po s te d f a c i l i ti e s Switch your phone off in any facility where posted notices so require. â P otentially explosive atmospheres Switch off your phone when in any area with a potentially explosive atmo sphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in suc h areas could cause an explosion or fire resu lting in bodily injury or even death. Users are advi sed to switch off the phone wh en at a refuelling point (servic e station). Users are rem inded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats; chemic al transfer or storage facilities ; vehicles using liquifie d petroleum gas (such as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain , dust or metal powders; and any othe r area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehic le engine. â Ve hi cl es Only qualified personn el should service the phone, or install the pho ne in a vehicle. Faulty installa tion or service may be dan gerous and may invalida te any w arranty whic h may apply to the unit. Check regularly that all wireless phone equipment in you r vehicle is mounted and operating prope rly . Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the phone, its parts or accessories. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including both installed or portable wireless equ ipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireles s equipment is impro perly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Important safety information 130 Switch off your phone before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wi reless telephone netw ork and may be illegal. Failure to observe these instructions may lead to suspension or denial of telephone services to the offender , or legal action or both. â Emerg enc y c alls IMPOR TANT! This phone, like any wireless phone, operates using radio signals, wireless and landline networks as we ll as user-programmed functions w hich cannot gu arantee connection in all co nditions. Therefore, you should ne ver rely solely upon a ny wireless phone for esse ntial commun ications (e.g. medi cal emer genc ies). Remembe r , to make or rec eive any calls the phone must be s witched on and in a service area w ith adequ ate cellular signal strength. Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless phone networks or when certain network services an d/or phone features are in use. C heck with local cellu lar service providers. To make an emergency call: 1. If the phone is not on, switch it on. Some networks may require th at a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the phone. 2 . P r e s s a s m an y t i m e s a s ne ed e d ( e .g . t o e x i t a c a ll , t o e x it a m e n u , et c .) to cl ea r t h e d i s p l a y. 3. K ey in the emergenc y num ber for your pr esent locatio n (e.g. 1 12 or othe r off icial emergenc y numbe r). Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Pr ess the key . If certain featu res are in use (Keypad lock, Fixed Dialling, etc.), you ma y first need to turn those featu res off before you ca n make an eme rgency c all. Consult this doc ument an d your loc al cellula r service provider . When mak ing an emergency ca ll, remember to give all the necessary inform ation as accurately as poss ible. Remember that your wireless phone may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident - do not cut off the call until given pe rmission to do so.
é 2000 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights reserved. Techni cal specific ations 131 Techni cal specific ations T echn ical spec ificatio ns Weigh t: ⢠174g Dimensions (min.- max): ⢠142 x 50-58 x 23 -27 mm, 1 59 cc Tal kt im e : ⢠3 h 15 mi n - 5 h 50 min 1 Standby time: ⢠72 h - 336 h 1 Durability: ⢠The Nokia 6250 can su rvive a drop up to 3 metres and immersion for up to 1 m inute in water up to 0.5 m deep . 2 Display: High resolution, illuminated, full-graphics dyn amic display , adjustable contrast, 96 x 60 pixels, 30.6mm x 24.1 mm, 7-bar battery and signal status indicators Dual band operation: EGSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 900 /1800 dual-band networks. Automatic switching between the bands. 1. Variation in operation times will occur depending on SIM card, netw ork settings and usage. 2. Water may not be warmer than 50 ð C.
LIMITED MANUFACTURERâÂÂS W ARRANTY PART OF EUROPE & AFRICA REGION This limi ted warran ty shall a pply in par t of Nok ia Mobile Phonesâ Europe & Afri ca Region unless a local warranty exis ts. Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd ("Nokia") warran ts that this NOKIA product ("Produ ct") is at the time of its original purchase fre e of defects in materi als, design and workmansh ip subject to the following t erms and condi tions: 1. This limited warranty is giv en to the end-purc haser of the Product ("Cu stomer"). It shall neithe r exclude nor limit i) any mandatory statu tory rights of the Customer or ii) any of the C ustome râÂÂs rights against th e seller /dealer o f the Product. 2. The warran ty period is twelve (12) mo nths from the date on which the fir st Customer purchase d the Product. In case of a subs equent purch ase or other change of owner /user , such warranty pe riod shall continu e for the remaining part of the twelv e (12) mont h period and otherwis e remain unaffected . This limited warranty is on ly valid and enforceab le in the follow ing countr ies: Bosnia, B ulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus , the Czech Republic, Est onia, any member state of the European Unio n, Hungary, Iceland, Israel, Latvia, Lithuani a, Macedonia, Malta, Norw ay , Poland, Romania, th e Slovak Republic, Sl ovenia, Switzerla nd and Turk ey. 3. During the warrant y perio d Nokia or its authori zed serv ice company will repai r or replace, at Nokia â s sole discr etion, a defective Prod uct. Nokia will r eturn the repaired Product or another Produ ct to the Customer in good wor king condition. All parts or other eq uipment for which replaceme nts have been pr ovided shall be come the proper ty of Nok ia. 4. A repaire d or replaced Product will n ot be given a prolonged o r renewed warranty period. 5. This lim ited warranty will not cove r painted covers or o ther similar pers onalized pa rts. In all cases that re quire unlocking or locking of an operator SIM-lock, Nokia will first di rect the C ustomer to such opera tor for un locking or locking of t he operator SIM-l ock before repairi ng or replacing t he Product. 6. This l imited warranty shall not appl y to deteriorat ions due to normal wear and tear . This limite d warranty shall furthe r not apply if: i. The defect was caused by the fact that the Product has been subje cted to: use in contradict ion with the o wner's/ user manu al, rough ha ndling, exposu re to moi sture, dampness or extreme therm al or environ mental conditio ns or rapid c hanges in su ch conditio ns, corrosio n, oxidati on, unauthori zed modificatio ns or connecti ons, unauthor ized opening or repair , repair by use of unauthori zed spare parts, m isuse, impr oper installat ion, accident, forces of nature, s pillage of food or liquid, i nfluence from chemical products or other acts beyond the reas onable control of Nokia (in cluding but no t limited to def iciencies in consumable pa rts, such as batte ries which all b y their nature have a limited lif etime, and brea kage or damage to antennas) unless the defect was caused directly by defects in mate rials, design o r workm anship; ii. No kia or its authoriz ed service com pany was not notifie d by the Cu stomer of th e defect wit hin thirty (30 ) days after the appearance of the defect with in the warranty period; iii. the Product wa s not retu rned to Nokia or it s authoriz ed service c ompany within th irty (30) days aft er the appearance of the defect within the warranty period; iv . the Product s erial number , the accessory da te code or the IMEI num ber has b een remov ed, erase d, deface d, altere d or is illeg ible; v . the def ect was caused by a defective function of the cellular n etwork; vi. the defect was caused by the fact that the Product was used with or conne cted to an accessory not m anufactured and suppli ed by Nokia or u sed in other than its int ended use; vii. the defect was caused by the fact that the battery was short-circui ted or seals of the battery encl osure or cells were broken or show evi dence of tampering or the batte ry was use d in equip ment othe r than fo r which it has be en specifie d; or viii. the Product software needs t o be upgraded d ue to changes in cellular netw ork parameters. 7. To claim this limite d warranty the Customer shall present either i) a le gible and non-mo dified original warranty card which cle arly indic ates the na me and address of the s eller , the date and place of purchase, t he product t ype and the IMEI or other s erial number or alter natively ii) a legi ble and non-modifie d original pur chase receipt which contain s the same info rmation, if s uch purchase re ceipt is pr esented to the sell er/dealer of the Product . 8. This limi ted warranty is the Customer's s ole and exclusive remedy against Nokia and Nokia's sole and exclusive liabilit y against the Custome r for defects or malfunct ions of the Pr oduct. Thi s limited w arranty r eplaces al l other warranties and liabilitie s, whether oral , written, (non- mandatory) s tatutory , contractual, in tort or otherwise. Nokia is in no event liable for any inc idental, conseque ntial or indire ct damage , costs or expe nses. Neithe r is Nokia in any event liable for any direct damage, costs or expenses, if the Custome r is a legal perso n. 9. Any chang e or amendment to th is limited warran ty requires Noki a's prior writ ten consent.
â WARRANTY CARD FILL IN WITH BLOCK LETTE RS Purchaser â s Name: _________ __________ ____________ __________ _________ Address: _________ __________ ____________ __________ _________ _________ __________ ____________ __________ _________ Country: _________ __________ ____________ __________ _________ Phone: _________ __________ ____________ __________ _________ Date of Purchase (dd/mm/yy): |_ _|__| /|__|__ | /|_ _|__| Product Type (on phone type label under battery): |__|__|__| â |__|__|__| Product Model (on phone type label under battery): |__|__|__| __| Phone Serial No (on phone type label under battery): |__|__ |__|__|__| __|/|__| __| /|__|__|__| __|__|__ |/|__| Place of Purchase: _________ __________ ____________ __________ _________ Store Name: _________ __________ ____________ __________ _________ Store Address: _________ __________ ____________ __________ _________ Stamp ITEM B IMEI